SERVICE MANUAL

Large Format Color Inkjet Printer

SC-P700/P703/P704/
P706/P708
SC-P900/P903/P904/
P906/P908

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SEIJ19-002
 Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright ©2020-2021 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

P Quality Assurance Department

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURY FROM METAL PARTS WITH
SHARP EDGES.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING
THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
7. MAKE SURE AN ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER USED FOR SERVICE SUPPORT. BE SURE TO HAVE THE
LATEST VIRUS DEFINITION FILE FOR THE SOFTWARE.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 About This Manual
About This Manual: This manual is made for the sole purpose of providing necessary information in order that a serviceperson qualified by Epson performs his / her appropriate
repair / maintenance for the applicable Epson’s products. You shall not use this manual out of this purpose.
This manual is Epson’s confidential information. When you use this manual, you shall hold it in strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party without
prior consent of Epson.
The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.

Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the electrical and mechanical basic operating principles of the product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and
adhesives required for servicing the product.
CHAPTER 7.APPENDIX
Provides the following additional information for reference:
- Wiring Diagram
- Panel Menu Maps

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury
or loss of life.

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury
or loss of life.

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
personal injury or may cause damage to, or destruction of
equipment.
Indicates a prohibited action during maintenance work.

Notes have important information and useful tips on the

operation of your equipment.

Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according

to a certain standard after disassembly and before
reassembly, otherwise the quality of the components in
question may be adversely affected.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
or condition that is necessary to keep the product's quality.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Indicates a lubrication point, practice, or condition that is
necessary to keep the product's quality.

Indicates that special tools and jigs are required.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A March 24, 2020 First release
Revised
 Chapter 4
■ Made change in 4.4.6 Major parts: ink system mechanism (p.176)

・4.4.5.6 Head FFC Assy (p.166) Procedure of wrapping the acetate tape around head FFC has been added.

・4.4.6.3 Tube guide Assy (p.188) Procedure of assemble the Tube guide Assy (No.4) has been added.
B August 6, 2020

・4.4.6.5 Ink system Assy (p.195) Prepare before attaching the Ink System has been added.
■ Made change in 4.5 Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit (p.233)

・Fan Filter (p.235) has been added.

・Sheet Block Dust (p.235) has been added.

Revised
 Chapter 2
■ 2.1.6 Motor and sensor list (p.31) Ink leak sensor boards have been subdivided.

■ Made change in 2.4.3 Ink leak detection function (p.43)

・2-20 Ink leak detection function (p.43) Ink leak sensor boards have been subdivided.

C August 6, 2021  Chapter 3

■ Made change in 3.3.1 Fatal error code display (p.59)

・CN No. in Ink leak error 1 (ink leak detector 1) (p.76) has been changed.
・Ink leak error 1 (ink leak detector 2) (p.76) has been added.
・Ink leak error 1 (ink leak detector 3) (p.76) has been added.
・Ink leak error 2 (p.77) has been added.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Revision Date of Issue Description
 Chapter 4
■ Made change in 4.2.1 Standard work time (p.87)
・CSIC connector (p.88) has been added.

■ Made change in 4.4.2 Disassembly Flowchart (p.93)

・ Screw type/fastening torque list (p.94) has been corrected.
・CSIC connector (p.98) has been added.
・Screw Type of ASF Assy (p.100) has been corrected.

■ Made change in 4.4.7.11 ASF Assy (p.221)

・18 Remove the six screws of the ASF Assy. (p.222) Screw Type of ASF Assy has been corrected.
 Chapter 5
■ Made change in 5.3 Adjustment Items (p.249)

・PG adjustment (p.249) has been changed to use adjustment program.

■ Made change in APG check (p.281)

C August 6, 2021 ・o [PG Condition Check on “PG1”] Adjustment procedure (p.281) has been added.
・5-33 [APG check] screen (p.281) has been replaced.

■ Made change in 5.5.1 PG adjustment (p.286)

・Change setting PG1 from manual to adjustment program in 5.5.1.1 Preparation (p.286) .

 Chapter 7
■ 7.2 Head Fuse (p.324) has been added.

■ Made change in 7.4 Parts names used in this manual (p.328)

・ Change ASP part name from Japanese to English.

・ Housing Side Right (p.328) Change ASP part name from TBD.

・ Stacker Assy (p.328) Change ASP part name from TBD.

・ IS Sub Board Assy (p.329) Change ASP part name from TBD.

・ CR Belt (p.329) Change ASP part name from TBD.

・ Change from “Holder, CSIC Connector” to " CSIC Connector (p.329)".

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description 2.3.2 Paper feed method and paper feed path ..................................................... 37
2.3.2.1 Front manual feed ............................................................................... 37
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 13 2.3.2.2 Paper feed from rear ASF ................................................................... 38
1.1.1 Weight, dimensions, and installation space requirement ........................... 13 2.3.2.3 Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P700) ............................................ 39
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 14 2.3.2.4 Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P900) ............................................ 40
1.2.1 Printer specifications ................................................................................. 14 2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principle ...................................................... 41
1.2.2 Power supply specifications ...................................................................... 15 2.4.1 Ink supply mechanism configuration ........................................................ 41
1.2.3 Ink specifications ....................................................................................... 15 2.4.2 Ink supply mechanism operating principle ................................................ 42
1.2.4 Printing specifications ............................................................................... 16 2.4.3 Ink leak detection function ........................................................................ 43
1.3 Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ 17 2.5 Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle ...................................................... 44
1.3.1 Supported media ........................................................................................ 17 2.5.1 Ink system mechanism configuration ........................................................ 44
1.3.1.1 EPSON special media ........................................................................ 17 2.5.2 Cleaning ..................................................................................................... 45
1.3.1.2 Supported commercially available paper sizes .................................. 21 2.5.3 Managing waste ink ................................................................................... 45
1.3.2 Printable area ............................................................................................. 23 2.5.4 Operating principle .................................................................................... 46
2.5.4.1 Driving path ........................................................................................ 46
Chapter 2 Operating Principle 2.5.4.2 Pump mechanism ............................................................................... 47
2.5.4.3 Cap mechanism .................................................................................. 48
2.1 Printer Mechanism Description .......................................................................... 25
2.5.4.4 Carriage lock mechanism ................................................................... 48
2.1.1 Print head ................................................................................................... 25
2.5.4.5 Wiper mechanism/Air release valve mechanism ............................... 49
2.1.2 Carriage/APG mechanism ......................................................................... 26
2.1.3 Paper feed mechanism ............................................................................... 27
2.1.4 Ink system mechanism ............................................................................... 28
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
2.1.4.1 Ink supply mechanism (supply system) ............................................. 28 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 51
2.1.4.2 Ink system mechanism (waste ink system) ........................................ 29 3.1.1 Preliminary check...................................................................................... 51
2.1.5 Mist recovery mechanism .......................................................................... 30 3.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting .................................................... 51
2.1.6 Motor and sensor list ................................................................................. 31 3.1.1.2 Check the usage environment ............................................................ 51
2.2 APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle ........................... 32 3.1.1.3 Check for recurrence of the trouble .................................................... 51
2.2.1 APG/driven roller release mechanism configuration ................................ 32 3.1.1.4 Checking the printer operation log ..................................................... 51
2.2.2 Operating principle .................................................................................... 33 3.1.1.5 Performing test prints ......................................................................... 51
2.2.2.1 APG mechanism ................................................................................. 33 3.1.2 Troubleshooting procedure ........................................................................ 51
2.2.2.2 Driven roller release mechanism ........................................................ 34 3.2 Power ON Sequence ........................................................................................... 52
2.2.3 PG type ...................................................................................................... 35 3.2.1 Mechanism abnormality checks ................................................................ 52
2.3 Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle ...................................................... 36 3.2.2 Mechanism normal/initialization ............................................................... 53
2.3.1 Paper feed mechanism configuration ......................................................... 36 3.2.3 Print quality related troubleshooting......................................................... 54

9
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.2.4 Paper feeding/ejection related troubleshooting ......................................... 57 4.4.3.12 Panel Assy ...................................................................................... 117
3.2.5 Other troubleshooting ................................................................................ 58 4.4.3.13 Housing upper Assy ....................................................................... 119
3.3 Fatal Error Code List .......................................................................................... 59 4.4.3.14 Stacker Assy (SC-P900 only) ......................................................... 121
3.3.1 Fatal error code display ............................................................................. 59 4.4.3.15 Stacker (13") (SC-P700 only) ........................................................ 122
4.4.3.16 Holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy ................................ 123
Chapter 4 Disassembly and Assembly 4.4.3.17 Damper ........................................................................................... 124
4.4.3.18 Housing lower Assy ....................................................................... 125
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 79 4.4.4 Major parts: electrical components .......................................................... 130
4.1.1 Precautions ................................................................................................. 79 4.4.4.1 IS sub board Assy ............................................................................. 130
4.1.2 Cautions after assembling .......................................................................... 80 4.4.4.2 CRCM board Assy ........................................................................... 131
4.1.3 Recommended Tools ................................................................................. 81 4.4.4.3 WiFi board Assy ............................................................................... 132
4.1.4 Orientation Definition ................................................................................ 81 4.4.4.4 Fan Assy ........................................................................................... 134
4.2 Parts Diagram ..................................................................................................... 82 4.4.4.5 Main board Assy .............................................................................. 136
4.2.1 Standard work time .................................................................................... 87 4.4.4.6 LED board Assy ............................................................................... 139
4.3 Common Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly ....................................... 90 4.4.4.7 Power supply Assy ........................................................................... 142
4.3.1 CR lock manual unlock procedure ............................................................ 90 4.4.4.8 High voltage board Assy .................................................................. 146
4.3.2 Handling of ink supply unit ....................................................................... 90 4.4.5 Major parts: carriage mechanism ............................................................ 149
4.3.3 Changing of PF roller shaft inner support cam positions prohibited ......... 91 4.4.5.1 APG Assy ......................................................................................... 149
4.4.5.2 Print head .......................................................................................... 153
4.4 Disassembly/Assembly Procedure ..................................................................... 92 4.4.5.3 Scale CR ........................................................................................... 157
4.4.1 About function differences between products and the component parts ... 92 4.4.5.4 Pulley driven Assy ........................................................................... 159
4.4.2 Disassembly Flowchart .............................................................................. 93 4.4.5.5 Motor CR Assy ................................................................................. 161
4.4.2.1 Hardware: SC-P700 ............................................................................ 94 4.4.5.6 Head FFC Assy ................................................................................ 166
4.4.2.2 Hardware: SC-P900 ............................................................................ 95 4.4.5.7 CR Assy ............................................................................................ 169
4.4.2.3 Hardware ............................................................................................ 96 4.4.5.8 CR belt .............................................................................................. 173
4.4.2.4 Electrical components ........................................................................ 97 4.4.5.9 Detector PW ..................................................................................... 175
4.4.2.5 Ink system mechanism ....................................................................... 98 4.4.6 Major parts: ink system mechanism ........................................................ 176
4.4.2.6 Paper feed mechanism ...................................................................... 100 4.4.6.1 Motor decomp Assy ......................................................................... 176
4.4.2.7 Carriage mechanism ......................................................................... 103 4.4.6.2 Ink supply Assy ................................................................................ 180
4.4.3 Major parts: hardware .............................................................................. 105 4.4.6.3 Tube guide Assy ............................................................................... 188
4.4.3.1 Roll paper 13 Assy (13") (SC-P700 only) ........................................ 105 4.4.6.4 Motor IS Assy .................................................................................. 192
4.4.3.2 Paper support Assy ........................................................................... 106 4.4.6.5 Ink system Assy ............................................................................... 195
4.4.3.3 Cover rear Assy ................................................................................ 107 4.4.6.6 CSIC connector ................................................................................ 198
4.4.3.4 Cover rear left ................................................................................... 108 4.4.7 Major parts: paper feed mechanism ......................................................... 200
4.4.3.5 Cover stacker Assy ........................................................................... 109 4.4.7.1 PF encoder Assy ............................................................................... 200
4.4.3.6 Cover MTC box ................................................................................ 110 4.4.7.2 Belt PF .............................................................................................. 201
4.4.3.7 Holder damper left Assy ................................................................... 111 4.4.7.3 PE detector Assy .............................................................................. 202
4.4.3.8 Holder damper right Assy ................................................................ 111 4.4.7.4 AP detector Assy .............................................................................. 203
4.4.3.9 Cover printer Assy ............................................................................ 112 4.4.7.5 Shaft release Assy ............................................................................ 205
4.4.3.10 Housing side right .......................................................................... 113 4.4.7.6 PGU Assy ......................................................................................... 208
4.4.3.11 Housing side left ............................................................................. 115

10
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.7 EJ Starwheel Assy ............................................................................ 209 6.4 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 317

4.4.7.8 Roller EJ front Assy ......................................................................... 213 6.4.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions ......................................................... 318
4.4.7.9 PGF Assy .......................................................................................... 216
4.4.7.10 Motor PF Assy ................................................................................ 218 Chapter 7 Appendix
4.4.7.11 ASF Assy ........................................................................................ 221
4.4.7.12 Tray front ........................................................................................ 226 7.1 Block wiring diagram ....................................................................................... 323
7.1.1 General ..................................................................................................... 323
4.5 Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit .................... 233
7.2 Head Fuse ......................................................................................................... 324
4.6 Routing FFCs/cables ........................................................................................ 236
7.3 Panel menu map .............................................................................................. 325
Chapter 5 Adjustment 7.4 Parts names used in this manual ....................................................................... 328
7.5 Notes on packing .............................................................................................. 330
5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 245
7.5.1 For SC-P700 ............................................................................................ 330
5.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 245
7.5.1.1 Securing the CR Assy ...................................................................... 330
5.1.2 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments ............................ 245
7.5.1.2 Securing the paper support ............................................................... 331
5.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part ........................................... 246 7.5.1.3 Securing cover stacker Assy ............................................................ 332
5.3 Adjustment Items .............................................................................................. 249 7.5.1.4 Securing rear cover ........................................................................... 332
5.4 Adjustment Program ......................................................................................... 251 7.5.2 For SC-P900 ............................................................................................ 333
5.4.1 Operating Environment ........................................................................... 251 7.5.2.1 Securing the CR Assy ...................................................................... 333
5.4.2 Details of adjustment program functions ................................................. 252 7.5.2.2 Securing the paper support ............................................................... 334
7.5.2.3 Securing the stacker ......................................................................... 336
5.5 Mechanism Adjustment and Check .................................................................. 286
7.5.2.4 Securing the cover stacker and cover printer ................................... 337
5.5.1 PG adjustment .......................................................................................... 286
7.5.2.5 Securing Rear Cover ........................................................................ 338
5.5.1.1 Preparation ........................................................................................ 286
5.5.1.2 PG adjustment procedure ................................................................. 289
5.5.2 Belt PF tension adjustment and check ..................................................... 290
5.5.2.1 Belt PF tension adjustment procedure .............................................. 290
5.5.3 LD roller height adjustment and check .................................................... 292
5.5.3.1 Preparation ........................................................................................ 292
5.5.3.2 LD roller height adjustment procedure ............................................ 293
5.6 Colorimetric Calibration ................................................................................... 295
5.6.1 Overview of the Colorimetric Calibration ............................................... 295
5.6.2 Adjusting Method of the Colorimetric Calibration ................................. 298
5.6.3 Maintenance menu ................................................................................... 309

Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 313
6.2 Transportation ................................................................................................... 314
6.3 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 315

11
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.1 Product Description  Installation space requirement

Table 1-1. Installation space requirement
1.1.1 Weight, dimensions, and installation space SC-P900 SC-P700
requirement A 576 mm 507 mm
B 173 mm*1*2 143 mm*3
DIMENSIONS C 110 mm 108 mm
 SC-P900 D 964 mm 858 mm

 When the tray is housed E 825 mm 723 mm

F 100 mm 100 mm
(W) 615 mm (D) 368 mm (H) 199 mm
Note *1: When printing on board paper, 405 mm or more rear space is required.
 When the tray is extended *2: When mounting optional roll paper unit, 332 mm or more rear space is required,
(W) 615 mm (D) 905 mm (H) 520 mm respectively.
*3: When printing on board paper or roll paper, 330 mm or more or 164 mm or more rear
 SC-P700
space is required, respectively.
 When the tray is housed
(W) 515 mm (D) 368 mm (H) 185 mm
 When the tray is extended
(W) 515 mm (D) 769 mm (H) 420 mm
A
WEIGHT

 SC-P900
Approx. 14.8 kg (main body only)
 SC-P700 B F
Approx. 12.6 kg (main body only)

C
D E

Figure 1-1. Installation space requirement

Product Description Product Description 13

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.2 Basic Specifications Table 1-2. Basic specifications

Specification
Item
1.2.1 Printer specifications SC-P900 SC-P700
 Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Table 1-2. Basic specifications Interface  IEEE802.11b/g/n/ac
Specification  Superspeed USB
Item
SC-P900 SC-P700  Windows 10 (32/64bit)
Paper width Max. A2 (17 inch) Max. A3+ (13 inch)  Windows 8.1 (32/64bit)
Windows
Printing method On-demand ink jet method  Windows 8.0 (32/64bit)
 Windows 7 (32/64bit)
Bidirectional shortest distance printing, unidirectional
Printing direction Supported OS
printing  Mac OS X 10. 9.x
Method F-Mach (F10)  Mac OS X 10.10.x
Mac OS  Mac OS X 10.11.x
Number of
360 (Mk:180 Pk:180)  Mac OS X 10.12.x
nozzles (Bk)
 Mac OS X 10.13.x
Head Number of
1440 (180 each x 8 colors)
nozzles (CI) During operation 10 to 35°C
Temperature
Nozzle pitch 180dpi (0.141mm) In storage -20 to 40°C (within 1 month)
Minimum dot size 1.5pl During operation 20% to 80% (without condensation)
Humidity
Cartridge type Independent color type (10 colors) In storage 5% to 85% (without condensation)
 Mk: Matte black Elevation During operation 3000 m or less
 Pk: Photo black One of the items which reached faster.
 GY: Gray  SC-P900
 LGY: Light gray 5 years or 12000 pages (A2 equivalent plain paper)
Printing service life
 C: Cyan  SC-P700
Ink 5 years or 12000 pages (A3+ equivalent plain
Color type  VM: Vivid magenta
paper)
 LC: Light cyan
 VLM: Vivid light magenta Table 1-3. Cartridge configuration
 Y: Yellow
2nd 10th
 V: Violet 1st row 3rd row 4th row 5th row 6th row 7th row 8th row 9th row
row row
(For the cartridge configuration, refer to Table 1-3.) VLM:
Mk: Pk: LGY: VM: LC:
Maintenance box User-replacing type GY: C: Vivid Y: V:
Matte Photo Light Vivid Light
Maximum printing resolution 5760 dpi x 1440 dpi Gray Cyan light Yellow Violet
black black gray magenta cyan
magenta
Full-digit side Home side

Product Description Basic Specifications 14

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.2.2 Power supply specifications 1.2.3 Ink specifications

Table 1-4. Electrical specifications Table 1-5. Ink specifications
Specification Item Specification
Item 100/240V Model Type Ink pack built-in ink cartridge
100/120V Model 220/240V Model
(Universal) Ink type Pigment
Rated voltage AC 100 to 120 V AC 220 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V See the expiration date printed on the ink cartridge package or on the
Use by date
Input voltage range AC 90 to 132 V AC 198 to 264 V AC 90 to 264 V cartridge (store at normal temperature)
Rated current 1.2 A 0.7 A 1.3 to 1.7 A Print quality
guarantee Six months after opening
Rated frequency 50 to 60 Hz expiry
Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz  During storage in package: -20°C to 40°C (within a month at 40°C)
Storage
SC-P900: 24 W  Installed in printer: -20°C to 40°C (within a month at 40°C)
During operation temperature
SC-P700: 22 W  Transporting in package: -30°C to 60°C (within three days at 60°C)
Power During standby 8W Ink cartridge
consumption WxDxH (mm) 30 x 93.3 x 70.2
During sleep mode 1.1 W dimensions
During power OFF 0.08 W 0.18 W 0.14 W

Product Description Basic Specifications 15

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.2.4 Printing specifications

Table 1-6. Printing specifications
Item Specification
Paper feed method Friction feed
Paper feed resolution 17.64 μm (1/1440 inch)
 Rear ASF
Paper path  Front manual feed
 Rear roll paper

Product Description Basic Specifications 16

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.3 Printing Specifications

1.3.1 Supported media

1.3.1.1 EPSON special media

CUT SHEET
Note *1: SC-P900 only for A2 or larger media *2: Support for border-less printing ○: Recommended, ×: Cannot be used

Table 1-7. Designated cut sheet list

Paper Basis
Supported feed Recommended All sides Printer driver
Category Type Size*1 thickness weight Printer panel UI ICC profile
path feed path border-less*2 and Airprint UI
(mm) (g/m2)
A2
A3+
A3
11x17”
(279.4x431.8mm)
Letter
A4 ASF/Front/ EPSON Photo Epson_SC-
Photo Paper 0.27 255 ASF ○ Photo Paper
Board/Roll Paper P900_P700_PhotoPaper.icc
8 x 10 inch
5×7 inch
High vision size
Photo Paper
KG
3.5×5 inch
Card
A2
A3+
Letter Epson_SC-
Photo Paper ASF/Front/ EPSON Photo
A4 0.27 250 ASF ○ Photo Paper <Luster> P900_P700_PhotoPaper(SilkTextur
<Luster> Board/Roll Paper <Luster>
5×7 inch e).icc
KG
3.5×5 inch

Product Description Printing Specifications 17

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 1-7. Designated cut sheet list (Continued)

Paper Basis
Supported feed Recommended All sides Printer driver
Category Type Size*1 thickness weight Printer panel UI ICC profile
path feed path border-less*2 and Airprint UI
(mm) (g/m2)
A3+
A3
11x17”
(279.4x431.8mm) EPSON Premium
Premium Glossy Letter ASF/Front/ Premium Glossy Photo Epson_SC-
0.2 200 ASF ○ Glossy Photo
Photo Paper Board/Roll Paper P900_P700_PhotoPaperLight.icc
A4 Paper
5 x 7 inch
KG
3.5×5 inch
Photo Paper A2
A3+
A3
10 x 12 inch
Letter Epson_SC-
Photo Paper ASF/Front/ EPSON Photo
0.3 300 ASF ○ Photo Paper CRISPIA P900_P700_PhotoPaperCRISPIA.ic
CRISPIA A4 Board/Roll Paper CRISPIA
c
8 x 10 inch
KG
5×7 inch
3.5×5 inch
US-C
A2
A3+
A3 EPSON Photo
Epson_SC-
Photo Matte 11x14” ASF/Front/ Matte Paper/ Photo Matte Paper/
Matte Paper 0.25 189 ASF ○ P900_P700_PhotoMattePaper(Pigm
Paper/Pigment (279.4x355.6mm) Board/Roll Pigment Pigment
ent).icc
Letter
A4
8x10”
(203.2x254mm)

Product Description Printing Specifications 18

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 1-7. Designated cut sheet list (Continued)

Paper Basis
Supported feed Recommended All sides Printer driver
Category Type Size*1 thickness weight Printer panel UI ICC profile
path feed path border-less*2 and Airprint UI
(mm) (g/m2)
A2
A3+
A3
Letter ASF/Front/ EPSON Super Epson_SC-
Matte Paper Super Fine Paper 0.12 102 ASF ○ Super Fine Paper
A4 Board/Roll Fine Paper P900_P700_SuperFinePaper.icc
Legal
US-B
US-C
US-C
A3+
Velvet Fine Art ASF/Front/ Velvet Fine Art Epson_SC-
A3 0.48 260 ASF ○ Velvet Fine Art
Paper Board/Roll Paper P900_P700_VelvetFineArtPaper.icc
Letter
Fine Art
A4
US-C Epson_SC-
UltraSmooth Fine ASF/Front/ UltraSmooth Fine
A2 0.46 325 ASF ○ UltraSmooth Fine Art P900_P700_UltraSmoothFineArtPa
Art Paper Board/Roll Art Paper
A3 per.icc

Product Description Printing Specifications 19

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

ROLL PAPER
All paper setting methods are for roll paper.
Note *1: Support for border-less printing ○: Recommended, ×: Cannot be used, LR: Left right border-less

Table 1-8. Designated roll paper list

Paper Basis
Supported feed Recommended All sides Printer driver and
Category Type Size*1 thickness weight Printer panel UI ICC profile
path feed path border-less*2 Airprint UI
(mm) (g/m2)
16"x100ft
329x10000mm
210x10000mm ASF/Front/ Epson_SC-
Photo Paper --- --- ASF LR EPSON Photo Paper Photo Paper
127x10000mm Board/Roll P900_P700_PhotoPaper.icc
100x10000mm
Photo Paper 89x10000mm
16"x100ft 0.27 250
329x10000mm Epson_SC-
Photo Paper ASF/Front/ EPSON Photo Paper Photo Paper
100x10000mm ASF LR P900_P700_PhotoPaper(SilkTextur
<Luster> Board/Roll <Luster> <Luster>
203.2x50000mm e).icc
101.6x50000mm
13"/17"x20' ASF/Front/ Epson_SC-
Canvas Satin --- --- Roll × Satin canvas Satin canvas
roll Board/Roll P900_P700_CanvasSatin.icc
Canvas
13"/17"x20' ASF/Front/ Epson_SC-
Canvas Satin --- --- Roll × Matte canvas Matte canvas
roll Board/Roll P900_P700_CanvasMatte.icc

Product Description Printing Specifications 20

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.3.1.2 Supported commercially available paper sizes

This printer supports the following paper specifications for non-EPSON media.

 Do not use paper that is wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or dirty.

 Load paper just before printing. Do not leave paper loaded on
the printer when not printing. Store paper properly following
the instructions that come with the paper.
 When large quantities of paper need to be prepared in advance,
before purchase, use the paper to make a test print.

CUT SHEET
Note *1: SC-P900 only for A2 or larger media
*2: Support for border-less printing ○: Recommended, ×: Cannot be used, △ : Operates with dirt/misalignment warning, △ *: Restricts paper width and △

Table 1-9. Commercially available cut sheet list

Paper
Basis weight
Class Type Driver paper type Size*1 thickness Set quantity Feeding method Border-less*2
(g/m2)
(mm)
A2
B3
A3+ Up to 5 mm
total
A3 thickness
US-B
B4
Legal
△
Make appropriate settings by referring Folio
Plain Paper Cut Sheet to the manual for the paper to be Letter 0.08 to 0.11 64 to 90 ASF
printed. Up to 12 mm
A4
total
B5 thickness
A5
Halfletter
A6
Up to 5 mm
User defined size
total △*
(54 x 86 mm to 329 x 1200 mm)
thickness

Product Description Printing Specifications 21

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 1-9. Commercially available cut sheet list (Continued)

Paper
Basis weight
Class Type Driver paper type Size*1 thickness Set quantity Feeding method Border-less*2
(g/m2)
(mm)
Matte Fine Art
Fine Art Paper Matte A2 or less/A3+ or more --- --- 1 ASF ○
Fine Art Paper
Japanese Paper Japanese Paper A2 or less/A3+ or more --- --- 1 ASF ○
Double Postcard Postcard 200x148mm --- --- 50 ASF ×
Postcard Postcard Postcard 100x148mm --- --- 50 ASF ○
IJ Postcard Postcard (Ink Jet Paper) 100x148mm --- --- 50 ASF ○
Thick Paper Cut sheet A2 or less/A3+ or more --- --- 1 Front ×
High Quality Disk
High Quality Disk Label Φ120mm --- --- 1 Front ×
Disk Label Label
Disk Label Disc label Φ120mm --- --- 1 Front ×

ROLL PAPER
Note *1: Support for border-less printing ○: Recommended, ×: Cannot be used

Table 1-10. Commercially available cut sheet list

Paper
Basis weight
Class Type Driver paper type Size*1 thickness Set quantity Feeding method Border-less*1
(g/m2)
(mm)
Matte Fine Art 17 inch width or less/
Fine Art Paper Matte --- --- 1 Roll ○
Paper 13 inch width or less
Fine Art
17 inch width or less/
Japanese Paper Japanese Paper --- --- 1 Roll ○
13 inch width or less

Product Description Printing Specifications 22

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

1.3.2 Printable area

Margins of papers are shown in the table. What is the printable area? Left end margin
Right end margin
Paper upper end side
 In printing with borders, this refers to the area excluding the margins of each side
of the paper.
 In border-less printing, in addition to the entire paper surface, this refers to the area
outwards from each side of the paper including the protruding area on the upper,

Upper end margin

bottom, left and right.

Table 1-11. Printable area

Record paper
Upper end Bottom end Left end Right end
Cut sheet (with all sides
3 3 3 3
border)
Cut sheet (without all
0 0 0 0
sides border)

Bottom end margin

Board paper 20 20 3 3
Roll paper (with left/right
50 19 3 3
margin)
Roll paper (without left/
50 19 0 0
right margin)
Roll paper (with left/right
margin) 50 14 3 3
TearOFF line reference*1 Paper bottom end side
Roll paper (without left/ Figure 1-2. Printable area
right margin) 50*2 14 0 0
TearOFF line reference

Note *1: When roll paper cutting line printing of the control panel is ON.
*2: Margin becomes 0 mm when printing consecutively.

Product Description Printing Specifications 23

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

2
OPERATING PRINCIPLE

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1 Printer Mechanism Description The following shows the nozzle arrangement when looking at the print head from the
back.
This chapter describes each primary printer mechanism used for this printer.
2.258 mm 2.258 mm 2.258 mm 2.258 mm 2.258 mm

2.1.1 Print head (64/720 inch)

6.4911 mm
(64/720 inch)

(184/720 inch)
6.4911 mm
(64/720 inch)

(184/720 inch)
6.4911 mm
(64/720 inch)

(184/720 inch)
6.4911 mm
(64/720 inch)

(184/720 inch)

This printer features the F10 Mach head, which has 10 rows of 180 nozzles.
Unlike a conventional print head, this F10 Mach head can eject all 10 colors without A#180 B#180 C#180 D#180 E#180 F#180 G#180 H#180 I#180 J#180

Paper feed direction

replacing ink. A#179
B#179
C#179
D#179
E#179
F#179
G#179
H#179
I#179
J#179
A#178 B#179 C#178 D#178 E#178 F#178 G#178 H#178 I#178 J#178

Table 2-1. Print head A B C D E F G H I J

Row Row Row Row Row Row Row Row Row Row

Number of
Row Color type Number of rows Nozzle pitch
nozzles 0.071 mm A#3 C#3 E#3 G#3 I#3
(1/360 inch) B#3 D#3 F#3 H#3 J#3
A Magenta A#2 B#2 C#2 D#2 E#2 F#2 G#2 H#2 I#2 J#2
0.141 mm
A#1 B#1 C#1 D#1 E#1 F#1 G#1 H#1 I#1 J#1 (1/180 inch)
B Cyan
C Photo black 37.254 mm

D Matte black 45.90 mm

1800 nozzles Each row
E Yellow 1 row for each Carriage movement direction
(180 nozzles for 0.141 mm
F Violet color
each row) (1/180 inch)
G Light gray Figure 2-2. Print head (2)
H Gray
I Light cyan
J Light magenta

Ink supply needle side (rear) Nozzle surface (bottom)

A row C row E row G row I row A row C row E row G row I row

B row D row F row H row J row B row D row F row H row J row
Figure 2-1. Print head (1)

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 25

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.2 Carriage/APG mechanism

Head tilt adjustment lever
The carriage mechanism primarily consists of a CR Assy, CR encoder, scale CR, motor
CR Assy, and CR timing belt. CR sub frame
CR Assy
Since the carriage mechanism moves the print head to the left or right to do printing,
this is a critical mechanism that impacts printing quality.

The CR Assy is supported by the CR Main Frame and CR sub frame attached to the APG unit
main frame.
APG motor
When the driving force from the motor CR Assy rotation is transmitted to the CR
timing belt, the CR Assy fixed to the CR timing belt moves left and right to perform Head inclination
printing. adjustment dial

The position and speed of the CR Assy are always monitored by the CR encoder and CR main frame CR encoder Eccentric cam
scale CR, and the motor CR Assy is controlled based on information from the CR
encoder. CR sub frame

In addition, an adjustment mechanism, which adjusts the inclination of the print head,
is provided to physically adjust the head inclination in accordance with the optimum
pattern among the adjustment patterns.

The head inclination adjustment mechanism can adjust the head in two directions
(horizontal and vertical (tilting the head)), and perform physical adjustment as needed.

The APG mechanism1adjusts the distance between the print head nozzles and the paper
(Platen Gap (PG)) to an appropriate height, depending on the paper to be printed.

When this mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the APG motor inside the APG
CR Assy
unit, through the APG unit, the CR Assy moves up and down by the eccentric cam
attached to the CR Assy.
Motor CR Assy
This causes a change in the distance between the CR Assy and platen to set an Scale CR
appropriate platen gap depending on the paper type.
CR main frame CR timing belt

Figure 2-3. Carriage/APG mechanism

1. For details, refer to ’2.2 APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle’ (p 32).

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 26

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.3 Paper feed mechanism

The paper feed mechanism of this printer is a new design that is an improved version of
the mechanism adopted in the SC-P700, etc. 1 Rear ASF

The paper feed mechanism allows front feed, which feeds papers from the front tray,
and rear feed, which feeds papers from the ASF, and it operates with the driving force
of the IS motor.
Paper feed
Also, the SC-P700 is equipped with a built-in roll unit, and the SC-P900 is equipped mechanism
with an external roll unit mechanism, which is an optional unit, and both support up to
13 inch/17 inch roll papers. Motor PF Assy

Front feed is primarily for printing on board paper, FA paper and other thick papers. Drive switching
mechanism
After the paper is pulled into the print start position from the front tray by the EJ/PF
roller, printing operation starts and then the paper is ejected to the front tray.
In addition, it is possible to print on a CDR or DVD surface. To print on a CDR or
DVD surface, in the same way, the CDR tray attached to the media to be printed is
inserted from the front tray.

For paper feeding from the rear ASF, papers are fed from the ASF, in which multiple
sheets can be set. When the driving force is transmitted from the IS motor via the gear EJ roller
train, the LD Roller is rotated to feed papers.
Front tray
A retard method is used for the sheet separation mechanism to accurately separate IS motor
PF roller
papers of various properties.

The IS motor has a drive switching mechanism to drive the Maintenance Unit in Option roll unit (external) Roll unit (built-in)
addition to the ASF.
The CR Assy operates this mechanism to switch driving. This mechanism consists of a
planet gear, switching lever, and retention mechanism.
The paper feed mechanism feeds papers during printing by driving the PF roller and
two sets of EJ rollers through the driving force of the PF motor.

SC-P900 SC-P700

1. For details, refer to ’2.3 Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle’ (p 36).
Figure 2-4. Paper feed mechanism

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 27

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.4 Ink system mechanism

The ink system of this printer is divided into a supply system, which supplies ink to the
print head, and a waste ink system, which treats ink after cleaning or flushing. Ink main flow path/diaphragm pump

Ink supply tube

2.1.4.1 Ink supply mechanism (supply system)
The ink supply mechanism consists of an ink supply unit (ink cartridge holder, ink Buffer
main flow path, diaphragm pump, buffer, decompression pump, ink supply tube, and
head valve Assy).

Ink is supplied from the ink carriages set on the ink cartridge holder.

When driving the decompression pump, the diaphragm pump sucks ink from the ink
cartridges and the ink is temporarily stored in the buffer via the main flow path.

According to the amount of ink to be discharged from the print head, the ink is sucked
from the buffer and is supplied to the print head via the ink tube and head valve Assy. Ink cartridge holder

In order to detect ink leakage as soon as possible, sensors1 are provided to detect ink
leakage from the ink supply path due to trouble, etc. Decompression pump Head valve Assy

Figure 2-5. Ink supply mechanism (supply system)

1. For details, refer to ’2.4.3 Ink leak detection function’ (p 43).

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 28

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.4.2 Ink system mechanism (waste ink system)

The ink system mechanism of this printer consists of the maintenance unit and
maintenance box.1

Ink sucked from the print head by the maintenance unit goes to the maintenance box
via the waste ink tube, and is retained by the waste ink porous pad. IS motor

For the amount of the waste ink, counter management is performed by taking
consideration of evaporation so that ink will not leak outside the printer even when the
retention limit is reached.

In addition, this printer uses a mechanism that allows users to replace the maintenance
box.

Maintenance box Maintenance unit

Figure 2-6. Ink system mechanism (waste ink system)

1. For details, refer to ’2.5 Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle’ (p 44).

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 29

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.5 Mist recovery mechanism

This printer is equipped with a mist recovery mechanism that collects mist (floating ink
that did not adhere to the printing surface) to a border-less absorbent by absorbing them
with the platen.
High-voltage module
This mechanism applies high voltage (approx. 360 V) generated with the high voltage
generation Assy (high-voltage module) to the electrode plate below the platen to attract
negatively charged ink. The purpose of this is to prevent mist ink from adhering to the
surface of parts inside the printer (rollers, encoders, sensors, etc.) and affecting print
quality and operation.

This function operates only within mainly the discarded ink area so that the mist
collection mechanism does not affect the print quality.

The position information of the CR is used to determine whether to turn ON or OFF the
mist collection function during CR printing driving based on the paper edge.

Also, if the sensor detector cover printer detects that the printer cover is open, this
function is disabled as the specification for safety purposes.

Electrode plate

Figure 2-7. Mist recovery mechanism

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 30

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.1.6 Motor and sensor list Table 2-2.

Mechanism name Motor/sensor name Motor/sensor type No.
The illustration of SC-P900 shows the motor and sensor types and positions. For SC-
P700, positions are almost identical. Carriage mechanism Motor CR Assy DC motor A
CR encoder Transmission type photo interrupter 11
Detector PW Reflection type photo sensor 10
20
F APG motor DC motor E
1 16
APG encoder Transmission type photo interrupter 13
Detector APG Assy Transmission type photo interrupter 15
A
2 Ink system mechanism IS motor DC motor D
3 IS encoder Transmission type photo interrupter 12
4 Decompression motor DC motor C
19
18 17 Ink end sensor board Transmission type photo interrupter 9
B
Ink leak sensor board1 Analog sensor board 21
15 Ink leak sensor board2 Analog sensor board 22
14
Ink leak sensor board3 Analog sensor board 4
13
Ink leak sensor board4 Analog sensor board 23
Paper feed mechanism Motor PF Assy DC motor B
PF encoder Assy Transmission type photo interrupter 3
Detector LD Assy Transmission type photo interrupter 7
E Detector AP Transmission type photo interrupter 18
5
6
12 PE detector Transmission type photo interrupter 20
7
8 Driven release detection Transmission type photo interrupter
14
D sensor
9 Detector front tray Mechanical contact 6
23
Detector roll unit Mechanical contact 8
21
11 Other Sensor detector cover Mechanical contact
10 2
22 printer
Detector stacker Mechanical contact 5
9 Roll unit* Detector roll cover Mechanical contact 1
Roll motor DC motor F
Roll encoder Transmission type photo interrupter 19
C Detector roll paper PE Transmission type photo interrupter 17
Roll paper setup detector Transmission type photo interrupter 16
Figure 2-8. Motor and sensor list Note *: Option for SC-P900

Operating Principle Printer Mechanism Description 31

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.2 APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism

Operating Principle APG sensor
CR Assy
Driven release
2.2.1 APG/driven roller release mechanism configuration detection sensor

This printer is equipped with the APG mechanism that automatically switches PG Combination gear
APG sensor flag
22-28.8-32.4
depending on the printing paper type and image quality.
PG switching cam
In addition, a driven roller release mechanism is mounted for releasing a driven roller
and re-nipping a medium when feeding papers from a front tray, such as CD tray label
printing or board paper printing.
Paper guide upper
The APG mechanism and driven roller release mechanism consist of the following Assy (driven roller)
parts.

Table 2-3. APG/driven roller release mechanism configuration

Area Parts Roles
Inside the APG unit APG motor Power source of APG mechanism/
driven roller release mechanism
APG encoder APG motor speed control
Driven release detection sensor Detection of the driven roller
release shaft position APG motor
APG gears APG motor drive transmission
APG encoder Driven roller
Inside CR Assy PG switching cam PG (6 types) height switching
release shaft
APG sensor/APG sensor flag Flag detection at the APG position
Main frame rear Driven roller release shaft Driven roller release/nip operation
actuator Figure 2-9. APG/driven roller release mechanism configuration

Operating Principle APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle 32

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.2.2 Operating principle

APG motor: Rotates CW APG motor: Rotates CCW
The APG mechanism transmits the driving force of the APG motor to operate the PG
switching mechanism and driven roller release mechanism. APG sensor

Since the APG motor power also drives the PG switching and the driven roller release
mechanism, the power is switched by the rotation of the combination gear 22-28.8-32.4
(see Figure 2-9) inside the APG unit. The combination gear 22-28.8-32.4 has teeth only
about half the circumference of the gear surface, and when switching PG, it is so
designed that switching is performed with an area where there is no gear so that driving
force is not transmitted to the driven roller release mechanism.

2.2.2.1 APG mechanism

With the APG mechanism of this printer, the gear train in the APG unit rotates the PG
switching cam of the CR Assy by the driving force of the APG motor, and the height of
the CR sub Assy moves up and down to change the distance between the print head and
the platen, realizing switching PG in six types.
APG sensor PF switching
flag cam CR sub Assy
The home position of PG is detected with the APG sensor flag, which is mounted on
the CR Assy to determine the home position (PG0).
Right side
APG sensor
To switch the APG, the driving force from the APG motor is transmitted to the APG
switching cam of the CR Assy via the gears inside the APG unit.

For setting PG to a narrow value, the APG motor rotates clockwise, and for setting PG
to a wide value, it rotates counterclockwise to perform switching.

The APG switching cam rotates by the motor drive, and when the APG sensor detects
the target PG position, motor rotation is stopped to hold the PG.

The APG sensor uses a photo interrupter, and controls the PG position based on the
position of the APG sensor flag attached to the drive shaft of the PG cam and the motor
speed detected by the APG encoder.
APG sensor
flag
APG motor

CR sub Assy

Figure 2-10. APG mechanism

Operating Principle APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle 33

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.2.2.2 Driven roller release mechanism Nip status: APG motor rotates CW
The APG unit is equipped with the driving source and drive transmission function to
operate the driven roller release shaft. Driven release
detection sensor
The same as PG switching, the driving force of the APG motor is used for switching.

When the driven roller release mechanism is operated, it is operated in a status where Paper guide
upper Assy
the CR is slightly moved from the home position to the Full-digit side so that the PG is (driven roller)
not switched.

The driving force from the APG motor is transmitted to the driven roller release shaft
via the gears inside the APG unit. Driven
release flag
For releasing, the APG motor rotates counterclockwise, and for nipping, it rotates
clockwise to perform switching.

The driven release detection sensor monitors the status of the driven roller release shaft
according to the change in the light shielding status by the rotation of the driven release
flag. In the nip status used for normal printing, the driven release flag is shielding light. Driven roller
In the release status, light is passing. release shaft

Release status: APG motor rotates CCW

Figure 2-11. Driven roller release mechanism

Operating Principle APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle 34

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.2.3 PG type
In this printer, six types of PG are set. The following describes the content of PG.

Table 2-4. PG type

APG motor rotation direction*1 CW CCW

APG sensor

→ → → → →
← ← ← ← ←
APG sensor output*2

APG sensor flag CR Assy

Light Light Light Light

Light passing Light passing Light passing Light passing Light Light
shielding passing
shielding shielding shielding shielding

PG5

PG4 4.5

3.5
PG3
PG position/
PG size [mm] PG2 2.1
PG1
PG0 1.5
1.2
0.9

Premium Glossy Matte Paper-Heavy Plain paper

→ → → → →
Application*3*4 Photo Paper weight Photo Quality Inkjet --- Board paper CD label
← ← ← ← ←
Capping PG adjustment Paper

Note *1: Rotation direction seen from the output shaft

*2: The flag part of the APG sensor flag shields light at each PG position.
*3: The PG value differs depending on the resolution and type of paper. The paper types listed for the application are examples. In the rub reduction mode, a one step higher PG setting is used.
*4: Capping of the print head is possible at any PG position. However, if the power is turned OFF normally, it is capped at the PG0 position.

Operating Principle APG/Driven Roller Release Mechanism Operating Principle 35

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.3 Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle

2.3.1 Paper feed mechanism configuration
The paper feed mechanism is driven by the IS motor and motor PF Assy.
After detecting the leading edge of the paper with the PE detector, the paper is fed by
rotating the PF roller/EJ roller by the driving force of the motor PF Assy in any paper
feeding method. APG motor APG encoder/APG
IS motor
Table 2-5. Paper feed mechanism configuration scale
IS encoder/IS
Feeding scale
Power source Control Roles
method LD roller
PF encoder Assy The PF roller/EJ roller are driven to feed/
Motor PF Assy Hopper
PF scale eject paper.
Front manual
feed APG encoder Detector LD
The paper guide Assy (driven roller) is
APG motor Assy
APG scale raised/lowered to nip the print media. Driven release
shaft
IS encoder The LD roller and hopper of the rear ASF
unit are driven to feed papers from the
IS scale rear ASF unit.
Rear ASF feed IS motor
Detects the phase (home position) of the
Detector LD Assy
LD roller.
Motor PF Assy PF encoder Assy
The PF roller/EJ roller are driven to feed/
(SC-P700,
PF scale eject paper. Paper guide Assy
SC-P900)
Roll paper feed (driven roller)
Roll motor Roll encoder The roll roller is driven to assist rolling of
(SC-P900) Roll scale the roll paper carried by the PF/EJ roller.

Roll unit
(SC-P900 option) Roll roller EJ roller

Roll paper PF roller

PF encoder Assy/
PF scale Motor PF Assy

Roll motor

Roll encoder/roll scale

Figure 2-12. Paper feed mechanism configuration (1) Figure 2-13. Paper feed mechanism configuration (2)

Operating Principle Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle 36

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.3.2 Paper feed method and paper feed path

2.3.2.1 Front manual feed PE detector
Paper guide
upper Assy
When the front manual feed is selected from the panel and the front tray is pulled out, (driven roller)
the APG motor drives to raise1 the paper guide upper Assy (driven roller), and prepares
to pull the print media into the printer. PF roller

When a paper size/type is selected and print media is set on the front tray or a CD tray
is set, the driven release shaft lowers the paper guide upper Assy (driven roller) to nip
the print media. After the PE detector confirms the presence or absence of the media,
the PF/EJ roller pulls the media into the printer.

The detector PW detects the leading edge (front side) of the paper. In addition, the
paper width detection and meandering check are performed during paper feed
operation.

CD tray
EJ roller

Figure 2-14. Front manual feed

1. See ’2.2.2.2 Driven roller release mechanism’ (p 34).

Operating Principle Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle 37

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.3.2.2 Paper feed from rear ASF

Hopper
The rear ASF is equipped with the hopper, paper return lever, D/E switching
mechanism, LD roller, and retard roller. Transmission of driving force from the IS
Detector LD Assy
motor to the rear ASF is controlled by the D/E switching mechanism.

In combination with the retard roller, the hopper and paper return lever driven by the
cam interlocked with the LD roller prevent double feeding, realizing reliable paper
feeding.

When printing is instructed from the rear ASF, CR operation operates the D/E LD roller
switching mechanism to select ASF driving.

When the LD roller is rotated by the driving force of the IS motor, the hopper cam also Paper return lever Retard roller
rotates synchronously, the hopper operates according to the phase of the cam, the print
medium is pushed up by the retard roller, and the print medium set on the ASF is
carried onto the PF roller by the frictional force of the LD roller.
D/E switching
After one rotation, the LD roller is stopped by the detector LD Assy, and the second mechanism
and subsequent media are not carried because of D-cut.

(The second and subsequent print media stay inside the ASF by the frictional force
PE detector
between the retard roller and the paper, preventing double feeding.)

After skew correction processing depending on the condition, the medium is carried to
the print start position. (The LD roller only rotates forward. The PF roller rotates in
reverse to correct skew.)

PF roller

Figure 2-15. Paper feed from rear ASF

Operating Principle Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle 38

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.3.2.3 Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P700)

After the roll unit is pulled out, when the roll paper is set and inserted manually until
the PE detector detects it, the roll paper is pulled in by the rotation of the PF roller.
PE detector Paper guide
After the driven roller is released once, re-nipping is performed to correct the skew and upper Assy
(driven roller)
the paper is carried by the PF roller to the position where the detector PW can detect
the paper. Roll paper

Roll unit

PF roller

Figure 2-16. Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P700)

Operating Principle Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle 39

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.3.2.4 Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P900)

When the roll paper is set in the roll unit and inserted manually until the PE detector
detects it, the roll paper is pulled in by the rotation of the PF roller.

At this point, it is necessary for the roll paper setup detector of roll unit and the detector
roll paper PE to be in the "paper exists" status.

After the driven roller is released once, the motor PF Assy and roll motor rotate
synchronously in the forward/reverse direction to correct skew and nip the driven roller
again. Roll paper Roll paper
Roll paper setup Roll PE detector
The paper is carried by the PF roller to the position where the detector PW can detect detector motor
Roll unit
the paper. (SC-P900 option)
PE detector

Paper guide
upper Assy
(driven roller)

PF roller

Figure 2-17. Paper feed from the roll unit (SC-P900)

Operating Principle Paper Feed Mechanism Operating Principle 40

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principle

2.4.1 Ink supply mechanism configuration

The ink supply mechanism consists of the following parts, and the decompression
pump and diaphragm pump suck ink from the ink cartridge according to the amount of
ink discharged from the print head.

Table 2-6. Ink supply mechanism configuration

Parts Roles
Ink holder Holder I/C Holds ink cartridge
CRCM contact R/W contact to ink cartridge CSIC CRCM contact

Check valve A Prevents backflow of ink to the ink cartridge Diaphragm pump
Ink supply path Diaphragm Sucks ink from the ink cartridge and sends ink to the Ink flow path/check valve A/check valve B
pump buffer chamber
Ink end sensor board
Ink flow path Ink flow path from the diaphragm pump to the buffer
chamber Buffer chamber

Check valve B Prevents backflow of ink to the diaphragm chamber

Buffer unit Buffer chamber Stores the enough ink for the amount of supply when
supplying ink to the print head
Ink supply path
Ink end sensor Detects the end of ink for each color
board
Ink tube
Decompression pump Reduces the air pressure in the air chamber in the
diaphragm pump and operates the diaphragm
Head valve Assy
Ink tube Ink supply path from the buffer chamber to the self- (self-sealing valve)
sealing valve
Self-sealing valve Prevents ink leakage and keeping constant ink supply
pressure to the print head

Holder I/C

Decompression pump
Buffer unit

Figure 2-18. Ink supply mechanism configuration

Operating Principle Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principle 41

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.4.2 Ink supply mechanism operating principle

Ink flow path schematic diagram
The decompression pump moves the diaphragm by reducing the pressure inside the
Decompression pump
diaphragm pump, sucks the ink from the ink pack, and supplies the ink to the print head Air release valve
via the buffer, the ink supply tube, and the self-sealing valve.

A CR contact module is attached to the ink cartridge holder to control the remaining Diaphragm (rubber film) Check
ink level by a firmware-based ink consumption counter and CSIC mounted on the ink Spring Air chamber valve B Spring Buffer
Check
cartridge. Ink cartridge
valve A

The ink end is detected by an ink end sensor board mounted on the buffer.

When the decompression motor inside the decompression pump rotates forward, air is
sucked from the air chamber inside the diaphragm pump.

When the air pressure in the air chamber decreases, the diaphragm is lifted, the check Ink chamber Diaphragm pump Ink end sensor Film choke
valve A opens, and the check valve B closes. Then ink is sucked from the ink cartridge board valve
and supplied into the ink chamber.

When the air release valve opens, the diaphragm is pushed down by the spring Self-sealing valve
pressure, check valve B opens, and ink is supplied to the buffer.
Ink tube
Print head
When a certain amount of ink is discharged before and after cleaning or during
printing, ink is sucked and supplied to the buffer.
Figure 2-19. Ink supply mechanism
The section between check valve A and the self-sealing valve is pressurized, allowing
stable ink supply.

Operating Principle Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principle 42

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.4.3 Ink leak detection function

This printer is equipped with four sensor boards that detect ink leakage immediately
when ink leakage occurs in the ink supply path due to a printer failure or other
problems. Ink leak sensor board1
Ink leak sensor board3 (Behind the buffer)
Ink supply unit
(Full side IC holder)
The electrode of the ink leak sensor board is in contact with the ink porous pad, and if
an ink leakage occurs and ink touches the electrode of the sensor board via the ink Ink leak sensor board4
porous pad, the electrode of the sensor board becomes conductive, thereby detecting (Near the Maintenance unit)
the ink leakage.
Maintenance unit
Ink leak sensor board2
The firmware checks the ink leak sensor boards when turning the power of the printer (Home side decompression pump)
ON and also periodically while the printer power is ON.

Ink
Inkporous
porouspad
pad Ink porous pad

Figure 2-20. Ink leak detection function

Operating Principle Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principle 43

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5 Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle The driving force of the IS motor operates each mechanism of the pump, cap, wiper,
carriage lock, and air release valve to perform cleaning of the print head and
transporting of waste ink to the maintenance box.
2.5.1 Ink system mechanism configuration
The ink system mechanism (waste ink system) consists of a maintenance unit having a
cap, pump unit, waste ink tube, etc., and a maintenance box (waste ink porous pad) that
IS encoder
holds ink absorbed from the print head. IS motor
Pump unit
The maintenance unit of this printer uses the direct driven type1 for its capping.

Intermittent gear
Head valve Assy

Air release valve

Carriage lock mechanism Print head

Valve mechanism Wiper/cap drive cam

Cap mechanism
Wiper

Pump mechanism

Wiper mechanism Pump drive

combination gear

Gear with clutch

Maintenance box
(Waste ink porous pad)
Cap

Carriage lock lever

Figure 2-21. Ink system mechanism configuration (1) To the maintenance box

Figure 2-22. Ink system mechanism configuration (2)

1. There are two types of capping method of ink system: direct driven type and slide type. In the direct driven type, the
cap moves up and down to perform capping independently from the carriage operation. On the other hand, in the slide
type, the carriage pushes the cap slider to perform capping (the cap is raised).

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 44

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5.2 Cleaning 2.5.3 Managing waste ink

The types of cleaning of this printer performed by the ink system mechanism are as Waste ink discharged by cleaning, etc. is held by the waste ink porous pad in the
follows. maintenance box.
For the amount of waste ink, a firmware-based counter control is performed by taking
Table 2-7. Cleaning
consideration of evaporation so that ink will not leak outside the printer even when the
Type Purpose retention limit is reached.
Initial ink charge Fills ink inside the print head. The count value is stored in the CSIC of the maintenance box and the EEPROM.
Manual cleaning CL1 Restores the nozzle meniscuses In addition, an absorbent material, the "holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy",
(MCL) CL2 Discharges bubbles from the print head is provided at the bottom in front of the paper guide for absorbing ink discharged
CL3 Discharges bubbles from the ink supply outside the paper during border-less printing or flushing. This porous pad is also
(Powerful cleaning) needle counter controlled as with the waste ink porous pad.
Timer cleaning (TCL) TCL4 Raises the ink level inside the self-sealing When each counter reaches the limit, a maintenance error is generated, and it is
valve necessary to replace the maintenance box, or replace the waste ink porous pad and reset
Empty suction Prevents ink leakage inside the cap. the counter.
Discharges waste ink inside the cap to the
maintenance box
Flushing Prevents thickening of ink inside the
nozzles. Discards ink periodically
(Inside the cap/groove without edge)

Holder, porous pad,

paper guide, lower Assy
Maintenance
box

Figure 2-23. Managing waste ink

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 45

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5.4 Operating principle

IS motor
2.5.4.1 Driving path
The ink system mechanism is operated by the driving force of the IS motor. Its driving
path is as follows.
Intermittent gear
The rotation of the pump drive gear drives the pump unit and is transmitted to the inter-
mittent gear and the wiper/cap drive cam via the gear with clutch. The rotation of the
wiper/cap drive cam moves the cap/wiper up and down, sets and releases the carriage
lock, and opens and closes the air release valve via each mechanism drive lever.
Wiper/cap drive
The relationship between the rotation direction of the pump motor and the operation of cam A
each mechanism is as follows.

Table 2-8. Relationship between the rotation direction of the pump motor and the
B
operation of each mechanism
D
IS motor rotation directiona C
Mechanism
CW CCW
Wiper Descend Ascend (wiping position)
Cap Descend Ascend (capping)
Pump Release Suction
Carriage lock Descend (carriage lock release) Ascend (carriage lock set)
Air release valve Open Close
a. Rotation direction seen from the output shaft

Code Name Code Name

Rotation of the wiper/cap drive cam moves the lever that drives each mechanism up
and down. The driving force of the IS motor is cut off by the gear with clutch and the A Combination gear IS C Combination gear
intermittent gear at the timing when the lever that drives each mechanism reaches the B Pump drive gear D Gear with clutch
upper end or the lower end. After that, when the IS motor rotates in reverse, the clutch
is engaged and the rotation direction of the wiper/cap drive cam changes, and the lever Figure 2-24. Driving path
that drives each mechanism moves up and down in the opposite direction.

Thereby, even if the IS motor continues rotating to drive the pump, each mechanism
other than the pump mechanism does not continue to operate.

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 46

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5.4.2 Pump mechanism

Pump frame
The pump mechanism sucks ink from the print head when cleaning is performed.
Pump tube
The driving force from the pump drive combination gear is transmitted to the pump
shaft via the timing plate. By this timing plate, Pump cam
a time lag is provided between the start of rotation of the pump drive combination gear
and the start of rotation of the pump shaft, so that the pump operates after the pump Pump shaft
motor has rotated for a while.
Timing plate
When the pump motor rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the output shaft
side, the driving force transmitted via the pump drive combination gear causes the Pump drive
pump pulley to rotate while crushing the tube to perform suction (generation of nega- combination gear
tive pressure). When the pump motor rotates clockwise, it rotates in a status where the
pump pulley does not crush the tube, the negative pressure is in released status. Pump frame
This printer has two pumps for improving the suction capacity.
Pump pulley Pump spring (x2)

Pump motor rotates CCW (suction) Pump motor rotates CW (release)

Pump pulley
Rotates while
crushing the tube
Pump spring (x2)

Pump tube Pump shaft

Rotates without
crushing the tube

Figure 2-25. Pump mechanism (1) Pump cam

Pump spacer

Figure 2-26. Pump mechanism (2)

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 47

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5.4.3 Cap mechanism 2.5.4.4 Carriage lock mechanism

The cap mechanism uses a direct driven type, which moves up and down by the driving The carriage lock is raised by the restoring force of the compression spring on the bot-
force of the pump motor, and performs capping of the print head during suction for tom surface of the carriage lock. When the carriage lock drive lever pushes the carriage
cleaning. lock downward, the carriage lock is released.

The wiper/cap drive cam rotates by the driving force from the pump motor, and the cap Since the carriage lock drive lever moves up and down along with the cap drive lever,
drive lever moves up and down along the cam surface to perform capping of the print the carriage lock operates in conjunction with the vertical movement of the cap.
head. Thereby, when the carriage lock is in the set status, the print head nozzle surface is
always in the capped status.
Descended status Print head Ascended status
Descended status Ascended status

Print head Carriage lock

Cap Wiper/cap drive

cam
Cap drive lever

Compression spring Cap drive lever Carriage lock Wiper/cap drive

drive lever cam
Cap
Wiper/cap drive
cam
Figure 2-28. Carriage lock mechanism

Cap drive lever The cam surface (dark blue part) of the wiper/cap drive
cam moves the cap drive lever up and down

Figure 2-27. Cap mechanism

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 48

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2.5.4.5 Wiper mechanism/Air release valve mechanism Wiper descended status Wiper ascended status
Valve: Open (air release) Valve: Closed
The wiper mechanism operates by the rotation of the wiper/cap drive cam. When the
wiper/cap drive cam rotates, the protrusion of the wiper drive lever moves along the cam
groove of the wiper/cap drive cam, thereby driving the wiper holder vertically. Tube Compression Link lever
(connected to the cap) spring
When the wiper is raised, the wiper drive lever releases the link lever, therefore, the air
release valve is closed by the restoring force of the compression spring. When the
wiper is lowered, the wiper drive lever pushes the link lever to open the air release Front
valve.

Wiper/cap drive Wiper

Tube cam
(connected to the cap)

Left
side

Wiper holder

Wiper drive lever

Wiper/cap drive cam (Full-digit side)
When the wiper/cap drive cam
rotates, the protrusion of
the wiper drive lever moves
along the cam groove (yellow
part) of the wiper/cap drive cam,
thereby driving the wiper holder
vertically. Protrusion of the wiper drive lever

Figure 2-29. Wiper mechanism/Air release valve mechanism

Operating Principle Ink System Mechanism Operating Principle 49

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

3
TROUBLESHOOTING

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.1 Overview 3.1.1.3 Check for recurrence of the trouble

Check if the trouble the user reported recurs with the printer.
This section explains the procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer quickly
and efficiently.  If a RIP was used, check if the trouble recurs when the driver is used.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take flexible measures by following
 If 3rd party media was used, check if the trouble recurs when genuine media
your sales company's policy and considering the trouble situation.
is used.
 If 3rd party ink was used, perform repair according to the policy of each local
3.1.1 Preliminary check sales subsidiary.
Make sure to perform the following basic checks before troubleshooting.  If the firmware is not the latest, gain agreement with the user on updating of
the firmware, and check if the trouble recurs when the latest firmware is used.
3.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting, perform basic checks such as checking the connection of the 3.1.1.4 Checking the printer operation log
power cable and checking the ink cartridge installation.  From the adjustment program, check the printer operation log (determine if
there are items that can be the cause of trouble).
3.1.1.2 Check the usage environment
 From the adjustment program, check the error history (check the occurrence
Check the user's usage environment. frequency and history of errors related to the trouble)
 Temperature/humidity of the installation site
3.1.1.5 Performing test prints
(For the guaranteed environment, see Chapter 1 (→P.14)
 Drivers/RIP used by the user For trouble related to print quality, carry out test print and check the current adjustment
status. (For the test print procedure, see Chapter 5 (→P.274).)
 Genuine media or 3rd party media?
 Genuine ink or 3rd party ink? 3.1.2 Troubleshooting procedure
 Firmware version (Is the latest version used?) Refer to the following items according to the observed symptoms, and carry out the
corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.
 Also check the items in the following table if necessary.
1. Trouble with print quality (→P.54)
Phenomenon Check item 2. Trouble with paper feeding/ejecting (→P.57)
Is the installation site inclined? 3. Other trouble (→P.58)
Is there any vibrating equipment near the site? 4. Fatal error or system error
Bad print quality The user's panel setting status
Is the interior dirty?
Clean if dirty.
Is there an air-conditioner ventilation duct
Missing dots/bad print quality
nearby?

Troubleshooting Overview 51
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.2 Power ON Sequence Operation details Printer operation status

4. Release detection initialization
operation
3.2.1 Mechanism abnormality checks 4-1. The status of the release detection Full HP 0

sensor is checked and the driving

Operation details Printer operation status direction of the APG/RLS motor is
determined based on whether the
1. Waste ink overflow check Full HP 0
sensor is in the light shielded state
1-1. The protection counter value is or light pass-through state.
read and whether or not there is 4-2. If the release detection sensor is in
Full HP 0
waste ink overflow is determined. the light shielded state, the APG/
2. CR lock release at power ON Full HP 0
RLS motor is driven
2-1. The ASF/MNU motor is driven counterclockwise to set the light
clockwise and the CR lock is pass-through state once.
unlocked. 4-3. The APG/RLS motor is driven
Full HP 0
clockwise from the release
3. Home position seeking detection sensor light pass-through
Full HP 0
3-1. The CR unit is moved slowly in the state until the shielded state is
0-digit direction and it is checked detected.
that the CR unit touches the right 4-4. The location after driving a set Full HP 0
frame. amount farther from that point is
3-2. The carriage is moved slowly to the Full HP 0
set as the starting point position.
130-digit side and it is checked that
the carriage touches the CR lock.
5. APG reset operation Full HP 0
5-1. The CR unit is moved slowly to the
3-3. The CR unit is moved slowly in the Full HP 0 0-digit side and it is checked that
0-digit direction again and it is the CR unit touches the right frame.
checked that the CR unit touches
the right frame. 5-2. The APG/RLS motor is driven Full HP 0
clockwise and it is checked that the
3-4. The home position is determined APG touches.
by regarding the position that the
CR unit touches the right frame to Full HP 0
be the position of the specified 5-3. The APG/RLS motor is driven Full HP 0
distance from the starting position. counterclockwise, the PG0 position
Then, the position of the CR unit is is detected by the APG sensor, and
monitored based on the information then the APG stops.
of the CR encoder.
5-4. The CR unit is moved slowly in the
3-5. The CR unit is moved slowly in the Full HP 0
Full HP 0
direction of the full-digit to move it
direction of the full-digit, and then
to the home position.
moved to the home position.

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 52

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Operation details Printer operation status 3.2.2 Mechanism normal/initialization

6. Motor CR Assy measurement Full HP 0
6-1. The CR unit is moved slowly in the Operation details Printer operation status
direction of the full-digit and 1. Low temperature operation Full HP 0
stopped at the full-digit. sequence
6-2. The load is measured while the CR Full HP 0
1-1. The CR unit is moved back and
unit is moved slowly in the forth twice between the full-digit
direction of the 0-digit and then the and home position.
CR unit is stopped at the home 2. PF measurement sequence Full HP 0
position. 2-1. The motor PF Assy is driven
7. D/E switching operation clockwise and the load is measured.
Full HP 0
7-1. The CR unit is moved slowly in the
direction of the full-digit and 3. CR lock setting Full HP 0

switching of the planet gear is 3-1. The CR unit is moved slowly in the
performed. direction of the 0-digit to move it to
7-2. The ASF/MNU motor is driven Full HP 0 the home position.
counterclockwise and D/E
3-2. The ASF/MNU motor is driven Full HP 0
switching from ASF to MNU is
counterclockwise and the CR lock
performed.
is set for the CR unit.
7-3. The CR unit is moved slowly in the Full HP 0
direction of the 0-digit to move it to
the home position.

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 53

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.2.3 Print quality related troubleshooting

This section describes assumed print quality issues, their causes and solutions. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to “Head cleaning” (P. 274) to print a nozzle check pattern.
Check the printed nozzle check pattern and if there are clogged nozzles, perform cleaning.

Table 3-1. Print quality related troubleshooting

Phenomenon Cause Check item Solution
1. Check for stains on the wiper or wiper cleaner. 1. Clean the wiper.
The wiper is contaminated or failed and wiping
2. Check for damage on the wiper or wiper 2. Replace the ink system Assy
cannot be performed properly.
cleaner. (→P.195).
1. Clean the cap.
The cap is dirty. Check if the cap is dirty. 2. Replace the ink system Assy
(→P.195).
Check if foreign matter is adhering to the print
Foreign matter is adhering to the print head. Clean the print head.
head.
The pump tube is abnormal and cleaning
Check if the pump tube is bent or pinched. If abnormal, correct the problem.
The nozzles are still clogged after cleaning. (sucking) cannot be performed normally.
Ink is leaked. Check all ink flow paths for leakage. If abnormal, correct the problem.
There are bubbles in the ink path. Check inside the ink flow paths for bubbles. Perform cleaning (→P.274).
1. Reconnect the head FFC.
Is the head FFC connected properly? Check for 2. If reconnection does not solve the problem,
The head FFC is not connected properly.
disconnection, skewing, or a peeled terminal. replace the head FFC because there is a
possibility of a broken wire(→P.166).
If the problem persists even after the above countermeasures, replace the following parts in order.
 Print head(→P.153)
 Main board Assy (the fuse could have been blown)(→P.136)
If adjustment is incorrect, perform adjustment
Check if the following adjustments were made correctly.
correctly.  CR direction inclination adjustment
Print head adjustment failure
 CR direction inclination adjustment (→P.259)
Ruled lines are misaligned  PF direction inclination adjustment  PF direction inclination adjustment
(→P.259)
1. Is the paper setting correct? 1. Set the paper setting correctly.
PG adjustment failure 2. Check if the PG adjustments were made 2. Perform the PG adjustment
correctly. (→P.265)

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 54

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 3-1. Print quality related troubleshooting

Phenomenon Cause Check item Solution
Perform the following adjustments.
Print head adjustment failure ---  CR direction inclination adjustment (→P.259)
 PF direction inclination adjustment (→P.259)
Perform the following adjustment.
 Paper feed amount (→P.268)
Paper feeding is abnormal. --- Check the following settings.
 Paper feed correction
 Paper tension
Banding in the main scanning direction 1. From the adjustment program, check the PF
1. Check if the PF scale is dirty or damaged. scale and encoder. (→P.283)
2. Check if the PF scale is installed correctly. 2. Clean the PF scale.
The PF scale or PF encoder Assy is abnormal.
3. Check if the PF encoder Assy is installed 3. Reinstall the PF scale and PF encoder Assy.
correctly. 4. Replace the PF scale (→P.233) and PF encoder
Assy (→P.200).
Apply the correct tension to the PF timing belt.
The belt PF tension is not appropriate. ---
(→P.290)
Motor PF Assy failure --- Replace the motor PF Assy (→P.218).
1. Is the paper setting correct?
1. Set the paper setting correctly.
PG adjustment failure 2. Check if the PG adjustments were made
2. Perform the PG adjustment (→P.265).
correctly.
1. Check if the scale CR is dirty or damaged. 1. From the adjustment program, check the scale
2. Check if the scale CR is installed correctly. CR and encoder.(→P.283)
3. Check if the CR encoder is installed correctly. 2. Clean the scale CR.
Banding in the sub-scanning direction The scale CR or CR encoder is abnormal.
3. Reinstall the scale CR and CR encoder.
4. Replace the scale CR (→P.157) and CR
encoder.
The CR belt tension is not appropriate. --- Replace the CR belt (→P.173).
The CR operating mechanism is not lubricated Check that the grease on the oil pad of the CR
If dry, apply lubrication (→P.317).
sufficiently. unit is not dry.

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 55

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 3-1. Print quality related troubleshooting

Phenomenon Cause Check item Solution
1. Check if the paper is wrinkled, fold, rippled, or
warped. 1. Replace with a new paper which has not been
2. Check if the paper is too thick and contacting deformed.
Paper is abnormal.
the head. 2. Adjust the PG setting according to the paper
The printed side is smudged or smeared 3. Check if the paper is too thin and loosening thickness.
with ink. when being fed.
Check if the PG adjustments were made
PG adjustment failure Perform the PG adjustment (→P.265).
correctly.
Check if the paper feed roller is dirty with ink, Clean the roller. (Print some blank pages to
The paper feed roller is dirty.
etc. remove dirt.)
Ink is adhering to the back side of papers. The platen is dirty. Check if ink is adhering to the platen. If the platen is dirty, clean it.
The ink in the ink cartridge is not agitated Shake the ink cartridges so that ink droplets
---
enough. spread evenly inside the cartridges.
Color or print density unevenness within a
Ink quality has deteriorated. Check the expiration date of the ink cartridge. Replace expired ink cartridges with new ones.
page or across pages
Check if the PG adjustments were made
PG adjustment failure Perform the PG adjustment (→P.265).
correctly.
Re-enter the head rank ID
Too much ink is discharged. Check if the head rank ID was entered correctly.
Blurred print (→P.255).
The dot size is not appropriate. Check the RIP setting. Change the RIP setting.
Trace marks of the pressure roller appear on the
Remove paper when the printer is left unused for
paper because the paper is set in the printer for a ---
Paper dust or traces of rollers appear on the a long time.
while.
printed surface.
Paper dust attached to the paper feed rollers was Check if the paper feed rollers are dirty with Clean the roller. (Print some blank pages to
transferred to the paper. paper dust. remove dirt.)

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 56

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.2.4 Paper feeding/ejection related troubleshooting

This section describes assumed paper feeding/ejection issues, their causes and solutions.

Table 3-2. Paper feeding/ejection related troubleshooting

Phenomenon Cause Check item Solution
Papers are not fed normally. PE detector has failed. --- Replace the PE detector ( → P.202).
1. From the adjustment program, check the PF
1. Check if the PF scale is dirty or damaged. scale and encoder. (→P.283)
2. Check if the PF scale is installed correctly. 2. Clean the PF scale.
The PF scale or PF encoder Assy is abnormal.
3. Check if the PF encoder Assy is installed 3. Reinstall the PF scale and PF encoder Assy.
Paper feeding or paper ejection is
correctly. 4. Replace the PF scale (→P.233) and PF encoder
abnormal.
Assy (→P.200).
The belt PF tension is not appropriate. --- Perform belt PF tension adjustment (→P.290).
Check if the paper feed rollers are dirty or
The paper feed roller is abnormal. If so, perform cleaning or replacement.
damaged.
“Detect Paper Meandering” is not set. --- Set “Detect Paper Meandering” to ON.
Paper is skewing
The detector PW is not working. --- Replace the detector PW (→P.175).
Perform paper feed amount adjustment
The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly. ---
(→P.268).
Actual margins differ from the specified Set the “Centering Printing” setting to ON. (Note
margins. that if the displacement from the set value is
“Centering Printing” is not set. ---
within 2 mm, it is the specification of this
printer.)

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 57

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.2.5 Other troubleshooting

Table 3-3. Other troubleshooting
Phenomenon Cause Check item Solution
The power cable is unplugged. Check if the power cable is plugged in correctly. If abnormal, correct the problem.
Check if the electrical outlet is overloaded due to Use one electrical outlet for the printer only if
The power voltage is unstable.
sharing with other electric equipment. possible.
There is a problem in the connection with the Check the connection between the power supply
If abnormal, correct the problem.
The printer is not powered. power supply board. board and main board Assy.
There is a problem in the connection with the Check the connection between the operating
If abnormal, correct the problem.
operating panel board. panel board and main board Assy.
If the problem persists even after the above countermeasures, replace the following parts in order.
 Power supply unit/main board Assy/panel Assy.
The network cable type is incorrect. Check if a cross cable is mistakenly used. Replace with a straight cable.
Check if the cable is normal.
 Is the cable connected properly?
The network cable is abnormal.  Is the cable broken? If abnormal, correct the problem.
Cannot access the network  Is the cable bent or is there an object on the
cable?
Check if the LAN connector is deformed,
The LAN connector is abnormal. If so, replace the main board Assy.
damaged or has some other abnormality.
If the problem persists even after the above countermeasures, replace the main board Assy (→P.136).
The CR belt tension is not appropriate. --- Replace the CR belt. (→P.173)
Lubrication on the CR unit and CR shaft is Pull the CR belt to check if the CR unit moves
If not smooth, apply lubrication.
insufficient. smoothly.
1. From the adjustment program, check the scale
The printer makes a strange noise when CR and encoder. (→P.283)
1. Check if the scale CR is dirty or damaged.
the CR is moving. 2. Clean the scale CR.
The scale CR or CR encoder is abnormal. 2. Check if the scale CR is installed correctly.
3. Reinstall the scale CR and CR encoder.
3. Check if the CR encoder is installed correctly.
4. Replace the scale CR (→P.157) and CR
encoder.
If the problem persists even after the above countermeasures, replace the motor CR Assy (→P.161)

Troubleshooting Power ON Sequence 58

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3.3 Fatal Error Code List

This section describes the fatal error code check procedure, and the fatal errors and
assumed causes.

3.3.1 Fatal error code display

The type of fatal error can be checked by reading the fatal error code saved to the
EEPROM on the main board Assy. using the adjustment program, but this product
displays the fatal error code automatically on the LCD on the panel when a fatal error
occurs.

For the part name in the table, following parts are the same.
 ASF/MNU motor (or encoder) = motor IS (or IS encoder)
 APG/RLS motor (or encoder) = APG motor (or encoder)

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 59

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
CR PID driving
000020 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
timeout error
main board Assy.
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 CR malfunction range.
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and maintenance unit is
 Mechanism load large normal.
 Main board Assy
 Interference with maintenance unit 3. Move the CR manually and check the load. CN301
CR PID excess load  Maintenance unit and CR lock lever malfunction 4. Check the amount of grease on the CR shaft.
000021 CN201
error  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
5. Check the drive mechanism of the CR.  CR sub board Assy
 CR encoder scale stains
6. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN101
 CR encoder failure
7. Replace the CR encoder.
 Motor CR Assy failure
 Main board Assy failure
8. Replace the motor CR Assy.
9. Replace the main board Assy.
 CR timing belt detached 1. Check the CR timing belt.
PRN  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
2. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.  Main board Assy
CR PID excess  CR encoder scale stains CN201
000022 3. Check the CR encoder FFC.
speed error  CR encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling  CR sub board Assy
4. Replace the CR encoder sensor. CN101
 CR encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Replace the main board Assy.

 Motor CR Assy operation error

 CR operation error 1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside range.
 Interference with maintenance unit 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and maintenance unit is
normal.  Main board Assy
 Gear detached or cracked
CR PID reverse 3. Check whether the timing belt is broken or loose. CN201
000023  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
error  CR sub board Assy
 CR timing belt teeth disengagement 4. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
CN101
 CR encoder scale stains 5. Check the CR encoder FFC and the connectors.
 CR encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 6. Replace the CR encoder sensor.
 CR encoder sensor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 60

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code

 Motor CR Assy rotation failure 1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
range.
 CR catching
 CR load large 2. Move the CR manually and check for catching and check the
load.
 Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
3. Check whether the timing belt is broken or loose.  Main board Assy
 Timing belt breaks or teeth disengagement
4. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN301
 CR encoder scale stains
000024 CR PID lock error CN201
 CR encoder FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted 5. Check for CR encoder FFC broken wires and check the
 CR sub board Assy
skewed, or peeling connectors.
CN101
 CR encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the CR encoder FFC.
 Motor CR Assy failure (lead wire is broken or connector is 7. Check the connectors of the motor CR Assy.
disconnected) 8. Replace the motor CR Assy.
 Main board Assy failure 9. Replace the main board Assy.
PRN  CR operation error
 CR operation impossible 1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside range.
 Mechanism load large 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and ink system is normal.  Main board Assy
 Interference with ink system CN301
CR PID speed 3. Check whether the timing belt is loose.
000025  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure CN201
reduction error 4. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
 Timing belt looseness or teeth disengagement  CR sub board Assy
5. Check the CR encoder FFC connectors. CN101
 CR encoder scale stains
6. Replace the motor CR Assy.
 CR encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling
 Motor CR Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
CR load positioning 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
 Firmware error or runaway
000030 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
 Main board Assy failure
error main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 61

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 CR malfunction range.
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and maintenance unit is
 Mechanism load large normal.
 Main board Assy
 Interference with maintenance unit 3. Move the CR manually and check the load. CN301
CR load positioning  Maintenance unit and CR lock lever malfunction 4. Check the amount of grease on the CR shaft.
000031 CN201
excess load error  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
5. Check the drive mechanism of the CR.  CR sub board Assy
 CR encoder scale stains
6. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN101
 CR encoder failure
7. Replace the CR encoder.
 Motor CR Assy failure
 Main board Assy failure
8. Replace the motor CR Assy.
9. Replace the main board Assy.
 CR timing belt detached 1. Check the CR timing belt.
 Motor CR Assy encoder read failure  Main board Assy
2. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
CR load positioning  CR encoder scale stains CN201
000032 3. Check the CR encoder FFC.
excess speed error  CR encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling  CR sub board Assy
PRN 4. Replace the CR encoder sensor. CN101
 CR encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Replace the main board Assy.

 Motor CR Assy operation error

 CR operation error 1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside range.
 Interference with maintenance unit 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and maintenance unit is
normal.  Main board Assy
 Gear detached or cracked
CR load positioning 3. Check whether the timing belt is broken or loose. CN201
000033  Motor CR Assy encoder read failure
reverse error  CR sub board Assy
 CR timing belt teeth disengagement 4. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
CN101
 CR encoder scale stains 5. Check the CR encoder FFC and the connectors.
 CR encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 6. Replace the CR encoder sensor.
 CR encoder sensor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
PF PID driving
000040 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
timeout error
main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 62

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Motor PF Assy rotation failure
 PF operation impossible 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside paper path.
 Paper feed mechanism load large 2. Check the load of the PF paper feed mechanism.
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure 3. Check the PF drive train and whether missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
PF PID excess load  PF encoder Assy scale stains
000041 4. Check for PF encoder Assy scale breaks and stains. CN302
error  Motor PF Assy cable/encoder FFC detached, disconnected,
5. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors. CN214
broken wire, inserted skewed, or peeling
6. Replace the PF encoder Assy.
 PF encoder Assy failure 7. Replace the motor PF Assy.
 Motor PF Assy failure (not a complete failure) 8. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
 PF timing belt detached 1. Check the PF timing belt.
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure
PRN 2. Check for PF encoder Assy scale stains, and perform cleaning.
PF PID excess  PF encoder Assy scale stains Main board Assy
000042 3. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors.
speed error  FFC encoder PF inserted skewed or peeling CN302
4. Replace the PF encoder Assy sensor.
 PF encoder Assy sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

 Paper feed operation error

 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 Paper feed mechanism load large paper path.
 Missing gear teeth or detachment of paper feed mechanism 2. Check the load of the PF paper feed mechanism.
train 3. Check the PF drive gear train and whether missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
000043 PF PID reverse error
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure 4. Check for PF encoder Assy scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN302
 PF encoder Assy scale stains 5. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors.
 FFC encoder PF inserted skewed or peeling 6. Replace the PF encoder Assy sensor.
 PF encoder Assy sensor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 63

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Motor PF Assy rotation failure
 Foreign matter jammed in paper feed path
1. Check whether jammed paper or other foreign matter.
 Paper feed mechanism load large
2. Check the load of the PF.
 Missing gear teeth or detachment of paper feed mechanism
train 3. Check the PF drive train and whether missing gear teeth.
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure 4. Check for PF encoder Assy scale stains, and perform cleaning. Main board Assy
000044 PF PID lock error  PF encoder Assy scale stains 5. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors. CN302
 FFC encoder PF disconnected, broken wire, inserted 6. Replace the PF encoder Assy sensor. CN214
skewed, or peeling 7. Check the connectors of the motor PF Assy.
 PF encoder Assy sensor failure 8. Replace the motor PF Assy.
 Motor PF Assy failure (lead wire is broken or connector is 9. Replace the main board Assy.
disconnected)
 Main board Assy failure
PF load positioning 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
 Firmware error or runaway
000050 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
 Main board Assy failure
error main board Assy.
 Motor PF Assy rotation failure
PRN
 PF operation impossible 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside paper path.
 Paper feed mechanism load large 2. Check the load of the PF paper feed mechanism.
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure 3. Check the PF drive train and whether missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
PF load positioning  PF encoder Assy scale stains
000051 4. Check for PF encoder Assy scale breaks and stains. CN302
excess load error  Motor PF Assy cable/encoder FFC detached, disconnected,
5. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors. CN214
broken wire, inserted skewed, or peeling
6. Replace the PF encoder Assy.
 PF encoder Assy failure 7. Replace the motor PF Assy.
 Motor PF Assy failure (not a complete failure) 8. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
 PF timing belt detached 1. Check the PF timing belt.
 Motor PF Assy encoder read failure
2. Check for PF encoder Assy scale stains, and perform cleaning.
PF load positioning  PF encoder Assy scale stains Main board Assy
000052 3. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors.
excess speed error  FFC encoder PF inserted skewed or peeling CN302
4. Replace the PF encoder Assy sensor.
 PF encoder Assy sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 64

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Paper feed operation error
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
paper path.
 Paper feed mechanism load large
 Missing gear teeth or detachment of paper feed mechanism 2. Check the load of the PF paper feed mechanism.
PF load positioning train 3. Check the PF drive gear train and whether missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
000053
reverse error  Motor PF Assy encoder read failure 4. Check for PF encoder Assy scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN302
 PF encoder Assy scale stains 5. Check the FFC encoder PF and the connectors.
 FFC encoder PF inserted skewed or peeling 6. Replace the PF encoder Assy sensor.
 PF encoder Assy sensor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
ASF/MNU PID Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
000060 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error main board Assy.
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
PRN matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
ASF/MNU PID  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
000061 CN304
excess load error  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU motor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Cable disconnected 7. Replace the ASF/MNU motor.
 Main board Assy failure 8. Replace the main board Assy.
 ASF/MNU drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the ASF/MNU drive train.
 ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
2. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
ASF/MNU PID  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains Main board Assy
000062 3. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
excess speed error  ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling CN213
4. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 65

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
ASF/MNU PID missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
000063  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
reverse error CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
ASF/MNU PID lock  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
000064 CN304
error  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
PRN  ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 ASF/MNU motor failure 7. Replace the ASF/MNU motor.
 Main board Assy failure 8. Replace the main board Assy.
ASF load 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
 Firmware error or runaway
000070 positioning driving 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
 Main board Assy failure
timeout error main board Assy.
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
ASF load missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
 ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
000071 positioning excess CN304
 ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
load error CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU motor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Cable disconnected 7. Replace the ASF/MNU motor.
 Main board Assy failure 8. Replace the main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 66

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 ASF/MNU drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the ASF/MNU drive train.
 ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
ASF load 2. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
 ASF/MNU encoder scale stains Main board Assy
000072 positioning excess 3. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling CN213
speed error 4. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
ASF load  Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
000073 positioning reverse  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
CN213
error  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
APG/RLS PID Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
000480 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
PRN
error main board Assy.
1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 APG/RLS drive system load error (jammed paper or other APG/RLS mechanisms.
foreign matter inside) 2. Check the load of the APG/RLS mechanisms.
 APG and RLS mechanism malfunction
3. Check the APG/RLS mechanism drive train and whether missing
 APG/RLS motor encoder read failure gear teeth. Main board Assy
APG/RLS PID
000481  APG/RLS encoder scale stains CN305
excess load error 4. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale breaks and stains.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure CN215
5. Check the APG/RLSU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 APG/RLS motor failure
6. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 Cable disconnected
 Main board Assy failure
7. Replace the APG/RLS motor.
8. Replace the main board Assy.
 APG/RLS drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the APG/RLS drive train.
 APG/RLS motor encoder read failure
2. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
APG/RLS PID  APG/RLS encoder scale stains Main board Assy
000482 3. Check the APG/RLS encoder FFC and the connectors.
excess speed error  APG/RLS encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling CN215
4. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 67

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Contamination by foreign matter 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 APG/RLS mechanism load error
APG/RLS mechanisms.
 Missing gear teeth, detachment, or locking of APG/RLS 2. Check the load of the APG/RLS mechanisms.
mechanism train 3. Check the APG/RLS mechanism drive train and whether missing
APG/RLS PID gear teeth. Main board Assy
000483  APG/RLS motor encoder read failure
reverse error CN215
 APG/RLS encoder scale stains 4. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale breaks and stains.
 APG/RLS encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the APG/RLSU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 APG/RLS motor rotation failure
 Contamination by foreign matter 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 APG/RLS mechanism load large APG/RLS mechanisms.
 Missing gear teeth, detachment, or locking of APG/RLS 2. Check the load of the APG/RLS mechanisms.
mechanism train 3. Check the APG/RLS mechanism drive train and whether missing Main board Assy
APG/RLS PID lock gear teeth.
000484  APG/RLS motor encoder read failure CN305
error
 APG/RLS encoder scale stains 4. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale breaks and stains. CN215
PRN  APG/RLS encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the APG/RLSU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the APG/RLS motor.
 APG/RLS motor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
PG load positioning Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
000490 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error main board Assy.
1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 APG/RLS drive system load error (jammed paper or other APG/RLS mechanisms.
foreign matter inside) 2. Check the load of the APG/RLS mechanisms.
 APG and RLS mechanism malfunction
3. Check the APG/RLS mechanism drive train and whether missing
 APG/RLS motor encoder read failure gear teeth. Main board Assy
PG load positioning
000491  APG/RLS encoder scale stains CN305
excess load error 4. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale breaks and stains.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure CN215
5. Check the APG/RLSU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 APG/RLS motor failure
6. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 Cable disconnected
 Main board Assy failure
7. Replace the APG/RLS motor.
8. Replace the main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 68

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 APG/RLS drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the APG/RLS drive train.
 APG/RLS motor encoder read failure
2. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
PG load positioning  APG/RLS encoder scale stains Main board Assy
000492 3. Check the APG/RLS encoder FFC and the connectors.
excess speed error  APG/RLS encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling CN215
4. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

 Contamination by foreign matter 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 APG/RLS mechanism load error
APG/RLS mechanisms.
 Missing gear teeth, detachment, or locking of APG/RLS 2. Check the load of the APG/RLS mechanisms.
mechanism train 3. Check the APG/RLS mechanism drive train and whether missing
PG load positioning gear teeth. Main board Assy
000493  APG/RLS motor encoder read failure
reverse error CN215
 APG/RLS encoder scale stains 4. Check for APG/RLS encoder scale breaks and stains.
 APG/RLS encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the APG/RLSU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 APG/RLS encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the APG/RLS encoder sensor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
CAP PID driving
000500 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
PRN timeout error
main board Assy.
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
CAP PID excess  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
000501 CN304
load error  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU motor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Cable disconnected 7. Replace the ASF/MNU motor.
 Main board Assy failure 8. Replace the main board Assy.
 ASF/MNU drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the ASF/MNU drive train.
 ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
2. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning.
CAP PID excess  ASF/MNU encoder scale stains Main board Assy
000502 3. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
speed error  ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling CN213
4. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
5. Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 69

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
CAP PID reverse missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
000503  ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
error CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 ASF drive system load error (jammed paper or other foreign 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
matter inside) paper path inside the ASF.
 ASF and maintenance unit malfunction 2. Check the load of the ASF and maintenance unit.
 Maintenance unit load error 3. Check the ASF and maintenance unit drive train and whether
missing gear teeth. Main board Assy
 ASF/MNU motor encoder read failure
000504 CAP PID lock error CN304
 ASF/MNU encoder scale stains 4. Check for ASF/MNU encoder scale breaks and stains.
PRN CN213
 ASF/MNU encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the ASF/MNU encoder FFC and the connectors.
 ASF/MNU encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the ASF/MNU encoder sensor.
 ASF/MNU motor failure 7. Replace the ASF/MNU motor.
 Main board Assy failure 8. Replace the main board Assy.
ROLL(ATC) PID Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
000720 driving timeout 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error main board Assy.
 Roll unit drive system load error (jammed paper or other 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
foreign matter inside) paper path inside the roll unit.
2. Check the load of the roll unit.  Main board Assy
 Roll paper feed mechanism malfunction
3. Check the roll unit drive train and whether missing gear teeth. CN216
ROLL(ATC) PID  Roll motor encoder read failure
000721  Roll unit
excess load error  Roll encoder scale stains 4. Check for roll encoder scale breaks and stains.
CN101
 Roll motor failure 5. Check the roll encoder FFC and the connectors. CN102
 Cable disconnected 6. Replace the roll motor.
 Main board Assy failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 70

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Roll unit drive system train part damaged or detached 1. Check the roll unit drive train.  Main board Assy
 Roll motor encoder read failure
2. Check for roll encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN216
ROLL(ATC) PID  Roll encoder scale stains
000722 3. Check the roll encoder FFC and the connectors.  Roll unit
excess speed error  Roll encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling
4. Replace the roll encoder sensor. CN101
 Roll encoder sensor failure
5. Main board Assy failure CN102
 Main board Assy failure (motor driver)
 Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside
 Roll unit mechanism load error 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 Missing gear teeth, detachment, or locking of roll unit paper path inside the roll unit.
 Main board Assy
mechanism train 2. Check the load of the roll unit. CN216
ROLL(ATC) PID
000723  Roll motor encoder read failure 3. Check the roll unit drive train and whether missing gear teeth.  Roll unit
reverse error
 Roll encoder scale stains 4. Check for roll encoder scale breaks and stains. CN101
 Roll encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling 5. Check the roll encoder FFC and the connectors. CN102
 Roll encoder sensor failure 6. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
 Roll unit motor rotation failure
PRN  Jammed paper or other foreign matter inside 1. Check that there is no piece of paper or foreign matter in the
 Roll unit mechanism load large paper path inside the roll unit.
 Main board Assy
 Missing gear teeth, detachment, or locking of roll unit 2. Check the load of the roll unit. CN216
mechanism train
ROLL (ATC) PID 3. Check the roll unit drive train and whether missing gear teeth.  Roll unit
000724  Roll motor encoder read failure
lock error 4. Check for roll encoder scale breaks and stains. CN101
 Roll encoder scale stains
5. Check the roll encoder FFC and the connectors. CN102
 Roll encoder FFC inserted skewed or peeling
6. Replace the roll motor. CN106
 Roll encoder sensor failure
 Roll motor failure 7. Replace the main board Assy.
 Main board Assy failure
Main board Assy failure (firmware error) 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
DCP1 driving
001012 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
timeout error
main board Assy.
 PE detector failure 1. Check the PE detector and check for cable broken wire and
 Main board Assy failure connector disconnection. Main board Assy
030001 PE detector error
 Light emission amount in light emission amount adjustment 2. Replace the PE detector. CN203
below threshold 3. Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 71

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Detector PW failure  Main board Assy
1. Check the PW detector and check for cable broken wire and
PW detector light  Main board Assy failure connector disconnection. CN201
030002 emission amount  Paper presence cannot be detected even though light  CR sub board Assy
2. Replace the PW detector.
adjustment error emission amount raised to maximum in light emission CN101
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN103
amount adjustment.
 PE detector failure
1. Check the PE detector and check for cable broken wire and
PE detector light  Main board Assy failure connector disconnection. Main board Assy
030003 emission amount  Paper presence cannot be detected even though light
2. Replace the PE detector. CN203
adjustment error emission amount raised to maximum in light emission
3. Main board Assy failure
amount adjustment.

1. Check the PW detector and check for cable broken wire and  Main board Assy
 Detector PW failure connector disconnection. CN201
VS_PW setting
030007  Main board Assy failure  CR sub board Assy
error 2. Replace the PW detector.
 Threshold values for paper presence/absence cannot be set. CN101
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN103
 Head FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or Main board Assy
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and
peeling CN401
Head hot before peeling of head FFC.
031001  Print head overheating CN402
printing error 2. Replace the head.
 Print head failure CN403
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN404
 Main board Assy failure
 Head FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or Main board Assy
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and
peeling CN401
Head hot after peeling of head FFC.
031002  Print head overheating CN402
flushing error 2. Replace the head.
 Print head failure CN403
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN404
 Main board Assy failure
Transistor  High load printing continued under a high temperature
environmental environment, and the head drive circuit protection function
031003 Replace the main board Assy. ---
temperature activated
abnormal error  Main board Assy failure
 Head FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or Main board Assy
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and
peeling peeling of head FFC. CN401
Head environmental
031004  Failure of thermistor inside head CN402
temperature error 2. Replace the head.
 Head environmental temperature is outside of -20<T<80℃ CN403
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN404
range

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 72

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Head FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or Main board Assy
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and
peeling CN401
Head hot during ink peeling of head FFC.
031005  Print head overheating CN402
replacement error 2. Replace the head.
 Print head failure CN403
3. Replace the main board Assy. CN404
 Main board Assy failure
1. When fuse not blown:
 Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, Main board Assy
 Head system power problem and peeling of head FFC. CN401
Head fuse blown  Head D73
031006 2. When fuse blown: CN402
error  Main board Assy fuse blown
 Replace the main board Assy. CN403
 Head failure CN404
3. In other case:
 Replace the print head.
Main board Assy
 Head FFC error (inserted skewed or foreign matter adhered) 1. State of head FFC CN401
VBS overvoltage
031008  Head failure 2. Replace the head. CN402
error
 Main board Assy failure 3. Replace the main board Assy. CN403
CN404
PRN Main board Assy
 Head FFC error (inserted skewed or foreign matter adhered) 1. State of head FFC CN401
Head FFC skewed
031009  Head failure 2. Replace the head. CN402
insertion error
 Main board Assy failure 3. Replace the main board Assy. CN403
CN404
Error with Main board Assy
communication  Head FFC disconnected, broken wire, or inserted skewed 1. State of head FFC CN401
031011 between print head  Print head failure 2. Replace the head. CN402
and main board  Main board Assy failure 3. Replace the main board Assy. CN403
Assy CN404
 CRCM fuse blown 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
CRCM fuse blown
033001  Main board Assy failure 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error
 FFC inserted skewed or broken wire main board Assy.
PCD internal data is not set correctly or is damaged 1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
033002 ASIC access error 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
main board Assy.
1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
Other ink device  Main unit setting values inconsistent
033003 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error  Main board Assy failure
main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 73

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
Other ink device  Main unit setting values inconsistent
033004 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error  Main board Assy failure
main board Assy.
1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
Other ink device  Main unit setting values inconsistent
033005 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
error  Main board Assy failure
main board Assy.
 Main board Assy
CN210
CN211
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and CN212
 FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or peeling  CRCM board Assy
CRCM access error peeling of CRCM FFC, and check the connectors.
033006  Main board Assy failure or relay board Assy failure CN1
(caused by hardware) 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the
 CRCM failure CN2
main board Assy or relay board Assy.
CN3
CN4
PRN CN6
CN7
 Main board Assy
CN210
CN211
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and CN212
 FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or peeling  CRCM board Assy
CRCM access error peeling of CRCM FFC, and check the connectors.
033007  Main board Assy failure or relay board Assy failure CN1
(caused by hardware) 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the
 CRCM failure CN2
main board Assy or relay board Assy.
CN3
CN4
CN6
CN7
1. Turn off the power, restart the machine, and check.
CRCM access error  Main board Assy failure
033008 2. If the same error occurs again even after a restart, replace the ---
(caused by firmware)  Firmware problem
main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 74

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
 Main board Assy
CN210
CN211
 CRCM FFC disconnected, broken wire, inserted skewed, or
1. Check for disconnection, broken wire, skewed insertion, and CN212
peeling
CSIC access error peeling of CRCM FFC, and check the connectors.  CRCM board Assy
 CSIC terminal/CRCM contact module failure
033010 CN1
(caused by hardware)  Main board Assy failure (main unit setting values 2. If the same error occurs again after a restart, replace the main
CN2
inconsistency that cannot be changed during repair) board Assy.
CN3
*: Occurs when the printer power is turned ON.
CN4
CN6
CN7
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the carriage
 State in which carriage does not move (occurs when home
operation range.
position seeking failed)
2. Unlock the carriage lock manually.
 Carriage operation load error (jammed paper or other
Home position seek (Maintenance unit problem when lock cannot be unlocked)
034001 foreign matter inside) ---
error 3. Move the CR manually and check the load.
 Maintenance unit failure (CR lock lever malfunction)
 Motor CR Assy failure
4. Check the CR operation while the power remains ON.
If it does not operate, there is a motor failure or main board
 Main board Assy failure
Assy failure.
PRN
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the carriage
 Unable to recover from interference between CR lock lever
operation range.
and CR
2. Unlock the carriage lock manually.
 Carriage operation load error (jammed paper or other
(Maintenance unit problem when lock cannot be unlocked)
034002 Deadlock avoidance foreign matter inside) ---
3. Move the CR manually and check the load.
 Maintenance unit failure (CR lock lever malfunction)
 Motor CR Assy failure
4. Check the CR operation while the power remains ON.
If it does not operate, there is a motor failure or main board
 Main board Assy failure
Assy failure.
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the carriage
 Touching could not be detected even though the CR moved
operation range.
by the specified step amount.
2. Unlock the carriage lock manually.
 Carriage operation load error (jammed paper or other
Touching could not (Maintenance unit problem when lock cannot be unlocked)
034003 foreign matter inside) ---
be detected 3. Move the CR manually and check the load.
 Maintenance unit failure (CR lock lever malfunction)
 Motor CR Assy failure
4. Check the CR operation while the power remains ON.
If it does not operate, there is a motor failure or main board
 Main board Assy failure
Assy failure.
Motor runaway  Motor is driving even though voltage not applied to motor.
034010 Replace the main board Assy. ---
error  Main board Assy failure

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 75

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
1. Check that the vicinity of the APG mechanism is normal.  Main board Assy
 Home cannot be detected and position is unknown even
2. Check the APG switching operation. CN201
after resetting APG.
APG target position CN305
034011  PG switching mechanism is not operating properly. 3. Replace the APG sensor.
not reached error  CR sub board Assy
 Detector APG Assy failure 4. Replace the APG unit. CN101
 Main board Assy failure 5. Replace the main board Assy. CN102
 Home position cannot be detected and position is unknown 1. Check whether there is foreign matter around the release shaft.
Release phase even after resetting the RLS 2. Check that the vicinity of the RLS/APG unit is normal. Main board Assy
034321
detection error  Detector RLS Assy failure 3. Replace the APG unit. CN202
 Main board Assy failure 4. Replace the main board Assy.
1. Check that there is no foreign matter within the CR operation
 Carriage operation load error (jammed paper or other range.
foreign matter inside) 2. Check that the vicinity of the CR lock and maintenance unit is
 Maintenance unit failure normal.  Main board Assy
 Main frame deformation 3. Move the CR manually and check the load. CN201
Wiping touching  CR guide rail deformation 4. Check the amount of grease on the CR shaft. CN301
034501
error  CR encoder failure (scale stains/detachment or encoder  CR sub board Assy
5. Check the drive mechanism of the CR.
board failure) CN101
PRN 6. Check for CR encoder scale stains, and perform cleaning. CN102
 Motor CR Assy failure
7. Replace the CR encoder.
 Cable disconnected 8. Replace the motor CR Assy.
9. Replace the maintenance unit.
1. Visually check for ink leak.(Behind the buffer)  Main board Assy
 Ink leak or moisture adhered CN101
Ink leak error 1 2. Replace the ink leak sensor board.
034841  Ink leak sensor board 1(cable) short  IS sub board Assy
(ink leak detector 1) 3. Replace the IS sub board Assy.
 IS sub board Assy failure or main board Assy failure CN1
4. Replace the main board Assy. CN3
1. Visually check for ink leak.(Home side decompression pump)  Main board Assy
 Ink leak or moisture adhered CN101
Ink leak error 1 2. Replace the ink leak sensor board.
034842  Ink leak sensor board 2(cable) short  IS sub board Assy
(ink leak detector 2) 3. Replace the IS sub board Assy.
 IS sub board Assy failure or main board Assy failure CN1
4. Replace the main board Assy. CN4
1. Visually check for ink leak.(Full side IC holder)  Main board Assy
 Ink leak or moisture adhered CN101
Ink leak error 1 2. Replace the ink leak sensor board.
034843  Ink leak sensor board 3(cable) short  IS sub board Assy
(ink leak detector 3) 3. Replace the IS sub board Assy.
 IS sub board Assy failure or main board Assy failure CN1
4. Replace the main board Assy. CN5

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 76

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Error Error
Error name Assumed cause Check procedure CN No.
type code
1. Visually check for ink leak.(Near the Maintenance Unit)  Main board Assy
 Ink leak or moisture adhered CN101
2. Replace the ink leak sensor board.
034831 Ink leak error 2  Ink leak sensor board 4(cable) short  IS sub board Assy
3. Replace the IS sub board Assy.
 IS sub board Assy failure or main board Assy failure CN1
4. Replace the main board Assy. CN6
PRN
Error caused by Due to user environment
060001 other than printer Individual support ---
device
Driver mismatch  Unsupported driver
060002 Check the OS and driver versions. ---
error  Custom driver and custom printer combination incorrect
Wireless board Wireless board failure 1. Check the connection state of the connectors. Main board Assy
202620
failure 2. Check the wireless board. CN102
Panel Assy failure or not connected  Main board Assy
1. Check the connection state of FFC. CN501
203004 Panel Assy failure
2. Check the panel Assy.  Panel Assy
SYS CN101
Firmware internal bugs were appropriately assigned. 1. Check the firmware version, and update it.
200000 Firmware problem ---
2. Check the main board Assy.
Firmware internal bugs were appropriately assigned. 1. Check the firmware version, and update it.
300000 Firmware problem ---
2. Check the main board Assy.

Troubleshooting Fatal Error Code List 77

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Precautions

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of EPSON
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
LP-8500C/LP-8500CPD/LP-8300C/LP-8300CPD.
Be sure to follow the steps when disassembling the unit.  When the PRINTR COVER is opened, a safety-interlock
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by mechanism causes the CR MOTOR and the PF MOTOR to
reversing the disassembly procedure. stop. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure to take
Furthermore, for units or components not described in this chapter, perform the safety precautions and turn the function back to enabled after
disassembly and assembly work in reference to the overall exploded view in Service the operation.
Parts Information (SPI).  The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary
side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always
 WARNING supplied unless the AC Cable is unplugged. To prevent electric
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure to follow
described under the heading “WARNING”. the instructions below.
 CAUTION  Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to AC Cable from the AC outlet and confirm the LEDs are
equipment. turned off by pressing the Power button on the Operating
Panel. This operation discharges the residual charge in the
 CHECK POINT printer.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”.  Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the
 REASSEMBLY metal and such directly.
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure,  Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. injury from sharp metal edges.
 Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes
 ADJUSTMENT
into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described
immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician.
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified
adjustments with reference to Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT”.  If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a
doctor immediately.
 LUBRICATION  When replacing or detaching and reattaching boards,
“LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or connectors, cables, FFC, etc., be sure to visually check that they
maintaining it after disassembling. are not pinched by or caught in other parts and that they do not
have any contact failures.

Disassembly and Assembly Overview 79

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface. 4.1.2 Cautions after assembling
 Use only recommended or s for disassembly, assembly or
adjustment of the printer.  The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and
 Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified. securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from
leakage.
 Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the
when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
 Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
boards.
as anti-static wrist straps.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs
 When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so
take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
moving parts.
edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
 When you have to remove any parts or components that are
 When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are
provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were.
sure to remember it before removing them.

Disassembly and Assembly Overview 80

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.1.3 Recommended Tools 4.1.4 Orientation Definition

To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table. For The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as
the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for follows.
Adjustments” in Chapter 5.

Table 4-1. Tools Up

General-
Tool Part code*2 Remark
purpose*1
Phillips screwdriver no. 1  1080530 Rear
Phillips screwdriver no. 2  --- Right
 Used when removing the LD
shaft holder.
Phillips bit screwdriver  ---
 Total length: 100 mm or shorter
Shaft length: 35 mm or longer
Flat-bladed screwdriver  ---
Precision screwdriver no. 1  ---
Tweezer  ---
Long-nose pliers  ---
Acetate tape --- 1003963

Note "*1": “○”: Commercially available

"*2": The tools with part codes can be obtained from EPSON.
Left
Front

Down

Figure 4-1. Orientation Definition

Disassembly and Assembly Overview 81

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.2 Parts Diagram

 Cover rear left (p108)

 Cover printer Assy (p112)

 Housing upper Assy (p119)

 Housing side left (p115)

 Cover rear Assy (p107)

 Cover stacker Assy (p109)

 Housing lower Assy (p125)

 Housing side right (p113)

Figure 4-2. Housing

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 82

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 WiFi board Assy (p132)

 High voltage board Assy (p146)  Main board Assy (p136)

 Power supply Assy (p142)

 CRCM board Assy (p131)

 Panel Assy (p117)

 IS sub board Assy (p130)

Figure 4-3. Electric Circuit Components

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 83

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 APG Sensor (p234)

 Motor CR Assy (p161)

 CR belt (p173)

 Head FFC Assy (p166)

 Scale CR (p157)

 Pulley driven Assy (p159)

 CR Assy (p169)

Figure 4-4. Carriage Mechanism

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 84

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Ink supply Assy (p180)

 Holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy (p123)

 Ink system Assy (p195)

 Motor decomp Assy (p176)

Figure 4-5. Ink System Mechanism

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 85

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 ASF Assy (p221)

 AP detector Assy (p203)

 APG Assy (p149)

 Detector LD Roller (p234)

 Tray front (p226)

 Stacker Assy (SC-P900 only) (p121)  PGU Assy (p208)

Stacker (13") (SC-P700 only) (p122)

Figure 4-6. Paper Feed Mechanism

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 86

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.2.1 Standard work time Table 4-2. Standard work time

Time
The standard work times required to replace components and units are listed in the
Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/
following table. These standard work times were determined based on MTTR Total
Assembly Inspection
measurement results using a prototype of SC-P900/P700 series.
Underlined components and units are those established as ASP. Holder Panel 0:08 --- 0:08
Housing Upper Assy 10:54 --- 10:54
Table 4-2. Standard work time
Time Spring 0:08 --- 0:08
Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/ Lock Stacker 0:16 --- 0:16
Total
Assembly Inspection Holder Speaker 11:17 --- 11:17
Cover, Rear Left 0:25 --- 0:25 Speaker Assy 11:36 --- 11:36
Roll Paper 13 Assy 0:17 --- 0:17 Combination Gear 12.2, 25.6 12:01 --- 12:01
Extension Spring 0.0.34 0:38 --- 0:38 Damper 12:38 --- 12:38
Paper Support Assy 0:13 --- 0:13 Spur Gear11.2 12:49 --- 12:49
Cover Stacker Assy 0:28 --- 0:28 Label Ink Position 0:49 --- 0:49
Cover MTC Box 0:39 --- 0:39 Panel FFC 12:57 --- 12:57
Band Cover Printer 0:28 --- 0:28 Housing Lower Assy 5:21 --- 5:21
Cover Panel FFC 0:08 --- 0:08 Porous Pad IS 5:37 --- 5:37
Panel Assy 1:35 --- 1:35 Ink Leak Sensor Board 5:45 --- 5:45
Holder Porous Pad Paper Guide Lower Holder Ink Detect 5:59 --- 5:59
2:13 0:34 2:47
Assy
Protection Sheet Porous Pad D 6:37 --- 6:37
Stacker Sub Front 0:47 --- 0:47
Lead Porous Pad D 6:49 --- 6:49
Stacker 1:05 --- 1:05
Detector Front Tray 5:54 --- 5:54
Foot 0:17 --- 0:17
Detector Roll Unit 5:44 --- 2:31
Cover Rear Assy 1:04 --- 1:04
Holder Sensor Stacker Assy 6:27 --- 6:27
Holder Damper Left Assy 0:53 --- 0:53
Detector Stacker 6:48 --- 6:48
Holder Damper Right Assy 1:29 --- 1:29
IS Sub FFC 12:59 --- 12:59
Housing Side Left 2:23 --- 2:23
IS Sub Board Assy 12:13 --- 12:13
Housing Side Right 2:36 --- 2:36
Shield Plate CRCM 11:37 --- 11:37
Housing Side Front 2:34 --- 2:34
CRCM Board Assy 12:51 --- 12:51
Sensor Detector Cover Printer 2:44 --- 2:44
Mounting Plate Fan Assy 12:51 --- 12:51
Cover Printer Assy 2:54 --- 2:54

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 87

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 4-2. Standard work time Table 4-2. Standard work time
Time Time
Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/ Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total Total
Assembly Inspection Assembly Inspection
WiFi Board Assy 13:19 --- 13:19 Shield Plate Board 12:44 --- 12:44
Fan Assy 13:35 --- 13:35 Motor Decomp Assy 16:58 10:00 26:58
Mounting Plate 13:35 --- 13:35 Motor IS Assy 29:12 1:30 30:42
Main Board Assy 22:11 3:30 25:41 Tube Clamp 3:03 --- 3:03
Cover Harness PS 1st 0:20 --- 0:20 Ink System Assy 8:54 --- 8:54
Cover Harness PS 2nd 0:30 --- 0:30 Porous Pad PGF Upper 19:05 --- 19:05
Power Supply Assy 21:46 17:30 39:16 Electrode Plate Paper Guide Front 21:11 --- 21:11
High Voltage Assy 25:02 3:00 28:02 Holder Cable CSIC 21:15 --- 21:15
LED Assy 14:51 --- 14:51 Holder Connector Assy 28:10 --- 28:10
Cover PCB LED 11:15 --- 11:15 Cable FFC Eject 28:39 --- 28:39
Cover CR 11:30 --- 11:30 Holder Connector CSIC 28:39 --- 28:39
Support Guide Tube 12:12 --- 12:12 CSIC connector 28:39 --- 28:39
Guide FFC Head 13:30 --- 13:30 Holder MTB 28:48 --- 28:48
Guide Tube Ink Assy 16:33 --- 16:33 Spring Housing Ink Eject 29:19 --- 29:19
Tube Clamp 16:47 --- 7:13 PF Encoder Assy 3:00 1:00 4:00
Sheet Protection Tube Outer 17:42 --- 17:42 PF Scale Assy 2:36 1:00 3:36
Grounding Plate CR 18:30 --- 18:30 FFC Encoder PF 13:19 --- 13:19
Grounding Plate Guide Tube 18:45 --- 18:45 Belt PF 3:22 5:00 8:22
Guide Tube Carriage 20:38 --- 20:38 Holder Gear Planet Assy 23:09 --- 23:09
Sheet Protection Tube Inner 21:15 --- 21:15 Grounding Spring Shaft LD 23:12 --- 23:12
Holder Guide Tube 21:15 --- 21:15 Holder Shaft LD 11:22 --- 11:22
Clamp Tube Head 21:15 --- 21:15 Holder AP Assy 23:32 --- 23:32
Frame Top Front 11:10 --- 11:10 Extension Spring 23:54 --- 23:54
CRCM FFC 11:23 --- 11:23 AP Sensor 24:22 --- 24:22
CRCM FFC B 11:45 --- 11:45 Lever AP Sensor Assy 24:42 --- 24:42
Ink Supply Assy 37:09 20:00 57:09 ASF Assy 49:08 6:00 55:08
Torsion Spring EJ 12:12 --- 12:12 PE Detector Assy 49:54 1:30 51:24

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 88

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 4-2. Standard work time Table 4-2. Standard work time
Time Time
Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/ Part/Unit Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total Total
Assembly Inspection Assembly Inspection
Holder Shaft Release Assy 51:33 --- 51:33 Roller PF Assy 85:04 5:30 90:34
Grounding Spring Shaft Release 49:17 --- 49:17 Bushing Roller PF 85:27 --- 85:27
Shaft Release Assy 52:07 1:30 53:37 APG Assy 23:00 2:30 25:30
Torsion Spring PGU 53:22 --- 53:22 Combination Gear IS APG 23:06 --- 23:06
PGU Assy 54:42 2:00 56:42 Print Head 15:33 60:00 75:33
PGU Spring 55:02 --- 55:02 Mounting Plate Scale CR Right 11:18 --- 11:18
PGU Sub Assy 55:19 --- 55:19 Extension Spring 26.7 23:28 --- 23:28
PGU Support Assy 55:19 --- 55:19 Pulley Driven Assy 23:42 --- 23:42
EJ Starwheel Assy 33:43 --- 33:43 Holder Pulley Driven CR 23:55 --- 23:55
Grounding Spring EJ 33:59 --- 33:59 Extension Spring 24:13 --- 24:13
Roller EJ Front Assy 36:42 2:00 38:42 Slider Transmission 24:21 --- 24:21
Bushing Roller EJ 37:05 --- 37:05 CR Assy 26:20 28:30 54:50
PGF,Assy 42:41 16:30 59:11 Detector PW 17:38 12:00 29:38
Motor PF Assy 41:02 6:30 47:32 Plate Holder Belt 26:41 --- 26:41
Extension Spring 0.35 39:13 --- 39:13 CR Belt 18:00 5:00 23:00
Spur Gear 14.4 39:33 --- 39:33 Detector APG Assy 27:12 1:30 28:42
Tray Front Assy 43:26 --- 43:26 Head FFC Assy (w/ Holder FFC) 17:46 --- 17:46
Extension Spring 1.08 43:47 --- 43:47 Holder FFC 18:46 --- 18:46
Link EJ Left 44:51 --- 44:51 Ferrite Core 19:05 --- 19:05
Guide Tray Front Left 45:27 --- 12:18 Ferrite Core 19:37 --- 19:37
Link EJ Right 44:36 --- 44:36 Head FFC Assy 19:37 --- 19:37
Guide Tray Front Right 45:03 --- 45:03 Scale CR 12:23 1:0 13:23

Tray Front Assy 45:03 --- 45:03 Torsion Spring 13:04 --- 13:04

Tray Assist Assy 45:03 --- 45:03 Holder CR Scale Left 13:49 --- 13:49

Paper Guide Rear 82:47 --- 82:47 Motor CR Assy 42:07 8:30 50:37

Sleeve PF 83:07 --- 83:07

Spring PF 83:28 --- 83:28

Disassembly and Assembly Parts Diagram 89

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.3 Common Precautions for Disassembly and 4.3.2 Handling of ink supply unit
Assembly To prevent an ink leak, do not loosen or remove the screws of the ink tube connections
shown in the figure below. If the screw of an ink tube connection is loosened even
once, the ink supply unit must be replaced with a new one.
4.3.1 CR lock manual unlock procedure
To unlock the carriage lock, perform the following procedure.

1. Remove the cover rear Assy and housing side right.

2. Turn the combination gear IS APG counterclockwise.

Combination gear IS APG

CW CCW

Figure 4-7. CR lock manual unlock procedure

Table 4-3. Locking/unlocking carriage Screw

Rotation direction Carriage Figure 4-8. Position of removal prohibited screws
Clockwise (CW) Locks
Counterclockwise (CCW) Unlocks

Disassembly and Assembly Common Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly 90

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Unless otherwise specified in this manual, do not disassemble the ink supply unit 4.3.3 Changing of PF roller shaft inner support cam
into more units than it was in when supplied as ASP. If the ink supply unit is positions prohibited
disassembled, it will need to be replaced with a new one.
 Take care not to the damage the film that forms the ink flow paths. The screw fixing the position of the inner support cams of the PF roller shaft must not
be loosened or removed because image quality will be affected. (SC-P700: 1 location,
 When performing the disassembly and assembly work, take care not to apply a SC-P900: 2 locations)
load to each of the joints of the ink tubes (ink tube and buffer unit or ink tube and The following figure shows the location of the PF roller shaft inner support cam of SC-
cover valve Assy). P900. (1 location at center for SC-P700)

PF roller shaft inner support cam

Figure 4-9. Position of PF roller shaft inner support cam

Disassembly and Assembly Common Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly 91

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4 Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

4.4.1 About function differences between products and

the component parts
Although the printer mechanisms are basically the same for the products described in
this manual, there are structural differences because the functional composition differs.

The following describes the incorporated functions and structural differences of each
product.

Table 4-4. List of functions of each product

Differences
Function Disassembly and assembly
SC-P900 SC-P700
differences

Whether or not roll paper Optional part Built-in  Disassembly and assembly
unit exists procedures of roll paper
unit
 Disassembly and assembly
procedures of housing
lower
Whether or not cover rear Individual Component Removed as the roll paper unit
Assy exists parts parts of roll for the SC-P700.
(housing parts) unit
Fixing component of Fixed by two Fixed by Disassembly and assembly
stacker trays stacker stacker sub procedures of stacker Assy
stoppers front differ.
Quantity of release shaft 6 4
---
holder
Quantity of paper guide 6 8
---
upper Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 92

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.2 Disassembly Flowchart

This section describes procedures for disassembling the parts/units in a flowchart format. For some parts/units, detailed procedures or precautions are provided (accordingly
indicated by icons and cell's color). Refer to the explanations in the example chart below and perform an appropriate disassembling and assembling procedure. (see Disassembly/
Assembly Procedure (p92) / Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit (p233))
For how to route the cables and FFCs, refer to "Routing FFCs/cables (p236)".

 The example below shows how to see the charts on the following pages.

The name enclosed in gray Item Description Reference

Top CIS Assy
(p20) indicate a part/unit that
must be removed on the Parts White-letter Part/unit supplied as an ASP ---
way to the target parts. /unit
Shows necessary name Black-letter Part/unit not supplied as an ASP ---
 FFC/ Cable procedures before removing
the following parts.* Indicates a practice or condition that could result Indicates the reference
in injury or loss of life if not strictly observed. page in blue-letter
Indicates a practice or condition that could result
Feed Motor Unit Main Board White letters indicate Indicates the reference
a part/unit supplied in damage to, or destruction of equipment if not
page in blue-letter
as an ASP. strictly observed.
--- 1
Indicates the parts that are inevitably broken in
Shows the screw types Indicates the reference
1 4 and the specified the disassembling procedure, and should be
S4 page in blue-letter
torque on the “Screw replaced with a new one for reassembly.
(p 21) (p 27)
type/torque list”.
(p 22) (p 43) Indicates necessary check items in the Indicates the reference
Reference page disassembling/assembling procedure. page in blue-letter
Indicates supplementary explanation for Indicates the reference
Black letters indicate a part/ Shows removal/installation
disassembly is given. page in blue-letter
unit not supplied as an ASP. as a unit/Assy is available. Icon
Indicates particular tasks to keep quality of the Indicates the reference
Note "*": The box with only part names means the removal of the parts. If the name of units are required. page in blue-letter
FFC or a cable is shown, disconnect the FFC or cable from the connector. Indicates the reference
Indicates particular routing of cables is required.
page in blue-letter

Indicates particular adjustment(s) is/are required. Adjustment (p244)

Indicates lubrication is required. Maintenance (p312)

Indicates the number of screws securing the

---
parts/units.
Indicates the points secured with other than a
---
screw such as a hook, rib, dowel or the like.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 93

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.1 Hardware: SC-P700

START

Cover Rear Roll Paper 13 Paper Support Cover Stacker Band Cover HOLDER,POR Stacker Sub
Printer x2 Cover Panel FFC Foot x6
Assy Assy Assy Assy OUS Front
PAD,PAPER
3 --- --- --- 2 --- GUIDE,LOWER 4 ---
Assy
S5 S9 2 2 3 2 S10 1 2 S11 S9 2 ---
3
--- (p 105) (p 106) (p 109) --- --- 2 --- ---
S24

(p 123) (p 246)
Cover Rear Left Holder Damper EXTENSION Cover MTC Box Panel Assy Stacker
Left Assy SPRING,0.34x2
--- 1 --- --- 2 ---

1 S9 2 2 1 S6 4 4

(p 108) --- --- (p 110) (p 237) (p 318)

Holder Damper Housing Side Housing Side

Right Assy Left Right

1 2 2

S9 2 S9 6 S9 7 Screw type/fastening torque list

--- (p 115) (p 115) (p 113) (p 113) Code Screw type Fastening torque
S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
Holder Damper Housing Side  Connector Sensor S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Left Assy. Front Detector S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
--- S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
Band Cover 4 Sensor S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Printer Detector Cover
Printer S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
Cover Printer
Assy. S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
(p 234) S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
6
S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Paper Support Housing Side S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
Assy Right
S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Cover Panel S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
FFC Holder Panel
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Panel Assy. 1 S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
Housing Side
Left S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
1 (p 96)
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-1. Hardware: SC-P700

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 94

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.2 Hardware: SC-P900

START

Cover Rear Paper Support Cover Stacker Band Cover HOLDER,POR Stopper,
Cover Rear Assy Printer x2 Cover Panel FFC Foot x6
Assy Assy Assy OUS Stacker x2
PAD,PAPER
2 --- --- --- 2 --- GUIDE,LOWER 1 ---
Assy
S5 S9 2 2 3 2 S10 1 2 2 ---
3
--- --- (p 106) (p 109) --- --- 2 --- ---
S24

(p 123) (p 123)
Holder Damper Cover MTC Box Panel Assy
Cover Rear Left Left Assy Stacker Assy

--- 1 --- 2 ---

1 S9 2 1 S6 4 4

(p 108) --- (p 110) (p 237) ---

Holder Damper Housing Side Housing Side

Right Assy Left Right

1 2 2

S9 2 S9 6 S9 7 Screw type/fastening torque list

--- (p 115) (p 115) (p 113) (p 113) Code Screw type Fastening torque
S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
Holder Damper Housing Side  Connector Sensor S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Left Assy. Front Detector S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
--- S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
Band Cover 4 Sensor S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Printer Detector Cover
Printer S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
Cover Printer
Assy. S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
(p 234) S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
6
S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Paper Support Housing Side S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
Assy Right
S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Cover Panel FFC Holder Panel S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Panel Assy. 1 S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
Housing Side
Left S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
1 (p 96)
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-2. Hardware: SC-P900

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 95

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.3 Hardware
1 SC-P700 (p 94), SC-P900 (p 95)

Housing Upper  Cut Washer Label Ink Sensor

Spring x4 Holder Speaker Detector Cover
Assy Position
Printer
5 --- --- ---
Combination
S18 S13 1 2 2 Gear 1
12.2, 25.6 x2
(p 237) --- --- ---
---

1
Lock Stacker Speaker Assy
x4 ---

--- ---

1 1
Damper
--- ---
---

2
Printer
Mechanism Cable Panel (p 124)

---

1
Screw type/fastening torque list
Housing Lower Spur Gear 11.2
Assy.
Code Screw type Fastening torque
---
--- --- S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
--- 1 S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
(p 125) (p 125) ---
S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
(p 238) (p 318)
S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm

Ink Leak Detector Leaf Leaf Sensor Holder Sensor Connector S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Porous Pad IS Foot x6
Sensor Board B2 (Detector Roll Stacker Assy. Assy. Roll
(Detector Front Unit)
S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- Tray) 1 --- S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
--- 4 --- 2 S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S20 1
2
4 S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- --- ---
--- S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 233)
S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Holder,Ink, S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
Leaf Sensor
Detect (Detector S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
Stacker)
1 S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
---
S11 --- S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
2 S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
(p 234) S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Protection Lead,Porous S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Sheet,Porous Pad,D
Pad,D S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
--- S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
---
--- S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
---
--- S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-3. Hardware

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 96

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.4 Electrical components

START

Cover Rear Left  Connector Housing Lower  Connector

Assy
Cover Rear
Assy Cover Harness
PS 1st Cover PCB
Holder Damper  Connector x2 LED Light Assy LED
Right Assy (17”2Pecs)

Holder Damper 1 2 ---

Left Assy
S2 1 High Voltage S13 2 ---
Band Cover Assy
Printer (p 139) (p 139) (p 139)
---
2
Cover Printer
Assy
S13 2
Paper Support Cover Harness
Assy PS 2nd (p 246)
Cover Panel ---
FFC
2
Panel Assy.
---
Housing Side
Left
Housing Side Screw type/fastening torque list
Right Power Supply
Assy w/ Holder
AC Inlet Code Screw type Fastening torque
Holder Panel
S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
4
Housing Upper S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy S7 2
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
(p 142) (p 142) S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm

(p 239) (p 246) S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

 Connenctor buffer x1 Shield Plate  CN501/CN201 FFC (w/
 Connector Ink Leak x4 CRCM x2 Ferrite core) S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
 FAN Connector S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
4
 Wi-Fi Board Connector
S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S15 ---
Cable IS Sub S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- Mounting Plate
Fan Assy S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S19 1
4 S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
 CRCM FFC x6
--- S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S13 1
S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
---
CRCM Board S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
IS Sub Board Assy x2
Assy S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
4 S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
4  All connectors & FFC
WiFi Board Assy Fan Assy Mounting Plate
S16 --- on the Main Bord S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S19 1
1 --- --- S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
---
(p 246) S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S2 --- 4 ---
Main Board Assy S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- (p 134) --- S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
2
S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
S13 2 S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 246) S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-4. Electrical components

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 97

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.5 Ink system mechanism

START

Cover Rear Left Mounting Plate

IS Sub Board Porous Pad PGF Holder Cable
Assy Fan Assy Upper CSIC
Cover Rear
Assy APG Assy --- 2
Holder Damper
Right Assy Combination 4 2
 Tube Decomp S2
Gear IS APG
Holder Damper Connector x1
--- ---
Left Assy
Band Cover
Printer  IS Motor Connector
Shield Plate Encoder FFC Electrode Plate Holder
Cover Printer Board Paper Guide Connector,Assy
Assy Front
2 2
Paper Support 4
Assy Motor IS Assy
2 2 Holder,
S12 3 S25 Cable,FFC,Eject Connector,CSIC CSIC connector
Cover Panel
FFC --- 1 ---
--- 0 0 0
Panel Assy S13 2
1 1 2
Housing Side Motor Decomp (p 192) (p 192)
Left Assy --- (p 198) (p 198)

Housing Side 4 Screw type/fastening torque list

Right
Tube Cramp Code Screw type Fastening torque
S14 S7 ---
Holder Panel
---
S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
(p 246) Plate Spring
Housing Upper Holder MTB S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy MTB
1
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
--- ---
--- S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
2 1
Cover CR S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
 Ink Tube
3 S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm

S6 2 S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

Ink System Assy S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

---
S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
2
S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Support Guide S13 2 S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Tube
(p 195) (p 195)
S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
2 S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm

S6 1 S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm

S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
---
S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Guide FFC S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Head
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2 S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

S10 3 S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm

S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
---
S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
2 (p 99)
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-5. Ink system mechanism (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 98

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2 (p 98)

Cover Valve Shield Plate

Assy Board

1 Motor Decomp
S26
Assy
---

Torsion Spring
Ink Supply Assy EJ
Tube Guide Assy
5 0
1
S17 S13 4 2
4
Grounding (p 180) (p 180) ---
Tube Clamp Plate,Guide,Tube
(p 188) (p 188)
(p 236) (p 246)
--- ---

Frame Top --- 3

Front
--- ---
1 Screw type/fastening torque list
S18 2 Code Screw type Fastening torque
--- Sheet Protection Guide Tube Sheet Protection S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
Tube Outer Carriage Tube Inner
S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- ---
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
Cable CRCM 6 4 6 S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- --- ---
S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
1 S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Grounding Plate Holder Guide
CR Tube S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- --- S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Cable CRCM;B S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
4 2
S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
--- --- S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
1
S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
--- S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
Clamp Tube
Head S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
--- S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
 Connector LED x1
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
2
S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
---
IS Sub Board S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy.
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm

 Tube Decomp S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm

Connector x1 S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-6. Ink system mechanism (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 99

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.6 Paper feed mechanism

START

Cover Rear Left Grounding

Spring Shaft
Release
Cover Rear
Assy 1
Holder Damper
Right Assy S13 1

Holder Damper ---

Left Assy
Band Cover
Printer
Cover Printer
Assy Holder Shaft
LD x2
Paper Support
Assy 1
Holder Shaft
Cover Panel Release Assy
S13 1 x4
FFC
(p 318) 1
Panel Assy
S13 2
Housing Side
Left
ASF Assy ---
Housing Side Screw type/fastening torque list
Right
6
Code Screw type Fastening torque
Grounding
S5 S13 S27 2 Spring Shaft S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
PF Encorder FFC Encorder Release
Holder Panel PF Scale S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy PF (p 221) (p 221)
---
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
1 --- --- (p 246) (p 318)
2 S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
Housing Upper S3 1 1 1
Assy ---
S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 233) (p 246) (p 233) (p 246) --- S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
PE Detector Assy
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- Shaft Release S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy
Belt PF 3 S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- (p 202) (p 236)
4 S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- (p 246)
(p 205) (p 205) S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 246) S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
(p 246)
S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
APG Assy Torsion Spring S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
PGU x6
S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
3 (p 101) S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Motor IS Assy 2 S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Holder Gear S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
Planet Assy
PGU Assy x6 S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
--- S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
1 S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
2 S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
---
(p 208) (p 246)
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-7. Paper feed mechanism (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 100

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3 (p 100)

Mounting Plate Frame Top Roller EJ Front

Fan Assy Front Assy

---

Ink Supply 2
Main Board
Assy Assy
(p 213) (p 246)

(p 318)
 AP Detector EJ Starwheel
Connector Assy

--- Bushing Roller

PGF Assy EJ
2
Holder AP Assy 1 ---
(p 209) (p 209)
S7 4 2
1
(p 246)
(p 216) (p 246) Porous Pad PGF (p 318)
S13 2 Upper
(p 318)
(p 203) (p 236)
Housing Lower
Assy
Electrode Plate
Paper Guide Screw type/fastening torque list
APG Front
Photo Extension Extension Code Screw type Fastening torque
Interrupter Spring Belt PF
Spring 0.35
(Detector AP) S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
--- --- IS Assy S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Lever AP 2  PF Motor Connector S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
4 sensor Assy
S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
--- ---
Paper Guide S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Rear
Motor PF Assy S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
 E-Ring ---
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
4 S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
---
S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Spur Gear 14.4 (p 218) (p 246)
w/Spring Pin S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
Sleeve PF Roller PF Assy S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- ---
--- S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
--- 2 S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm

(p 233) (p 246)
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
---
Tray Front
Assy S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Bushing Roller S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
Spring PF PF
Grounding
Spring EJ
4 (p 102) S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- ---
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
2 2 S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
2 S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
--- (p 318)
--- S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-8. Paper feed mechanism (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 101

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4 (p 101)

 Cut Washer x2  Cut Washer x2

 E-ring
 Washer

Link EJ Right

Link EJ Left ---

---
---

--- (p 318)

(p 318)
Guide Tray
Front Right
Guide Tray
Front Left ---

--- ---

--- (p 318)

(p 318)
Screw type/fastening torque list
Tray Front
Assy Code Screw type Fastening torque
Extension C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
Spring 1.08 x2 --- S1

S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

--- ---
S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
--- (p 226) (p 226) S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm

---
(p 318) S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Tray Assist
Assy
S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
---
S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

--- S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-9. Paper feed mechanism (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 102

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
4.4.2.7 Carriage mechanism

START

Cover Rear Left Mounting Plate Torsion Spring

Fan Assy xx Mounting Plate
Scale CR Fan Assy
Cover Rear
Assy ---
Main Bord
Holder Damper  APG Motor Connector 2 Assy
Right Assy Encorder FFC Mounting Plate
Holder Damper --- Scale CR Right
Left Assy Head FFC Assy
1 w/Holder
Band Cover APG Assy FFC
Printer 1
S13
Scale CR ---
Cover Printer 5
Assy ---
0 3
S13 S2 2
Paper Support
Assy 3 ---
(p 149) (p 246)
Cover Panel APG Assy
FFC (p 157) (p 246)

Panel Assy Combination Holder FFC Ferrite Core Ferrite Core

Gear IS APG Pulley Driven Extension
Housing Side Assy Spring 26.7 --- --- ---
Left ---
Housing Side CR Belt --- 3 --- --- Screw type/fastening torque list
Right 1
Ink Supply 2 --- --- --- Code Screw type Fastening torque
Holder Panel --- Assy
--- S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
Housing Upper S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Assy
 CR Motor Connector Head FFC Assy S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm
Pulley Driven S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
Assy ---
Cover CR S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Torsion Spring --- 2
xx S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Support Guide 2
Tube (p 166) (p 166) S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
---
(p 159) (p 159) (p 239), (p 240) S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Guide FFC Head 2
S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Cover Valve --- S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Assy
Holder Pulley S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Driven CR
S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
Holder CR ---
 Head FFC x4 Scale Left S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
4 S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
1
(p 318) S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
Print Head S13 2
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
3 --- S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Extension S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S1 1 Spring
S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
(p 153) (p 153) Motor CR Assy ---
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 246) 2 S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
2
S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
--- ---
S21
S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
(p 161) (p 246) S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

5 (p 104) S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm

S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-10. Carriage mechanism (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 103

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5 (p 103)

Slider
Transmission

---

(p 318)

CR Assy

---

(p 169) (p 246)

Plate Cam Left Plate

Holder Belt APG Sensor

1 --- 1
Screw type/fastening torque list
S22 2 3 S2 ---
Code Screw type Fastening torque
--- --- (p 234) (p 246)
S1 C.B.B-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,FZN-3C 3±0.5 Kgfcm
S2 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

Leafspring S3 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 Kgfcm

Pressing Head CR Belt
S4 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 4 Kgfcm
2 --- S5 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

2 2 S6 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm

S22
S7 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
--- (p 173) (p 173)
S8 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 246) S9 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

Grounding Plate S10 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm

Head Left S11 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X8,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
--- S12 C.B.P-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm

4
S12
S13 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
S14 C.B.S-TITE P4 SCREW,3X10,F/ZN 8±1 Kgfcm
---
S15 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±0.5 Kgfcm
S16 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S17 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
Detector PW
S18 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZB-3C 8±1 Kgfcm
1 S19 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4±1 Kgfcm
S20 C.C.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZB-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S23 ---
S21 C.C.SCREW,3X4,FZN-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
(p 175) (p 175) S22 C.LAMIMEITO.P-TITE,3X6,F/ZN-3C 4 Kgfcm
(p 246) S23 C.P.B-TITE(P1) SCREW,2.5X4,F/ZN-3C 2±0.5 kgfcm
S24 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C 6±1 Kgfcm
S25 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C 8 Kgfcm
S27
S26 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2.5X6,F/ZN-3C 3±0.5Kgfcm
S27 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,3X5,F/ZN-3C 8±1Kgfcm

Flowchart 4-11. Carriage mechanism (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 104

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3 Major parts: hardware Rear

4.4.3.1 Roll paper 13 Assy (13") (SC-P700 only)

1. Draw out the roll paper 13 Assy (13") until it stops.
2. Remove the roll paper 13 Assy (13") while slightly bending the roll paper 13 Assy
so as to avoid the stopper at the rear (both sides) of the lane.

First insert the roll paper 13 Assy to behind one stopper and install
while slightly bending.

Roll paper 13 Assy (13") Stopper

Stopper

Roll paper 13 Assy (13")

Figure 4-10. Removing the roll paper 13 Assy (13")

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 105

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.2 Paper support Assy Slightly widen. Paper support Assy

1. Open the paper support Assy.
2. Slightly widen the left hinge part of the housing upper Assy, and remove the paper
support Assy from both left and right sides of the hinge part.

When assembling the paper support Assy, align the orientation of

the dowel on the right side of the paper support Assy with the boss
of the damper gear on the right side of the housing upper Assy.

Dowel of the Paper support Assy Boss of the damper gear

Hinge part

Figure 4-11. Removing the paper support Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 106

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.3 Cover rear Assy Rear Cover rear left

1. Open the cover rear left and remove the three screws.
 C.B.P. 3x10 (Black) ( ): 2 screws (6±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.P. 3x8 (Black) ( ): 1 screw (6± 1 Kgf·cm)
2. Remove the cover rear Assy in the direction of the arrow.

Cover rear Assy Hook

Figure 4-12. Removing the cover rear Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 107

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.4 Cover rear left Rear Cover rear left

1. Remove the cover rear Assy.(→P. 107)
2. With the cover rear left closed, pull the cover rear left in the direction of the arrow
and disengage the lower hinge to remove the cover rear left.

 If you pull the cover rear left while it is open, the hinge receiver
could be damaged.
 If the cover rear left is not removed according to the cutout of
the hinge, hinge may get damaged.

Schematic side view diagram of the hinge Hinge

Figure 4-13. Removing the cover rear left

Cutout hinge shaft Hinge

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 108

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.5 Cover stacker Assy

1. Open the cover stacker Assy to about 45 degrees.
2. Pull the cover stacker Assy in the direction of the arrow and disengage the hinges
at two locations to remove the cover stacker Assy.

If the cover stacker Assy is not removed according to the cutout of

the hinge, hinge may get damaged.

Schematic side view diagram of the hinge

Cover stacker Assy Hinge

Figure 4-14. Removing the cover stacker Assy

Hinge shaft Hinge Cutout

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 109

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.6 Cover MTC box Cover stacker Assy

1. Remove the cover stacker Assy.
2. Open the cover MTC box to about 45 degrees.
3. Pull the cover MTC box in the direction of the arrow and disengage the hinge at
one location to remove the cover MTC box.

If the cover MTC box is not removed according to the cutout of the
hinge, hinge may get damaged.

Schematic side view diagram of the hinge

Cover MTC box Hinge

Figure 4-15. Removing the cover MTC box

Hinge shaft Hinge Cutout

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 110

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.7 Holder damper left Assy 4.4.3.8 Holder damper right Assy
1. Remove the screw. 1. Remove the cover rear Assy.(→P. 107)
 C.B.P. 3x8 (Black) ( ): 1 screw (6±1 Kgf·cm) 2. Remove the screw.
2. While releasing the hooks at two locations, remove the holder damper left Assy in  C.B.P. 3x8 (Black) ( ): 1 screw (6±1 Kgf·cm)
the direction of the arrow.
3. While releasing the hooks at two locations, remove the holder damper right Assy
in the direction of the arrow.

Holder damper right Assy Hook

Figure 4-17. Removing the holder damper right Assy

Holder damper left Assy Hook

Figure 4-16. Removing the holder damper left Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 111

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.9 Cover printer Assy

1. Remove the holder damper left Assy.(→P. 111)
2. Remove the holder damper right Assy.(→P. 111)
3. Remove one screw each, and separate the two band cover printers from the cover
printer Assy.
 C.B.P. 3x6 (Black) ( ): 2 screws
Cover printer Assy
4. Open the cover printer Assy to 90 degrees or more, slide it in the direction of the
arrow and disengage pins from the left and right dowels to remove the cover
printer Assy.

Band cover printer

Dowel

Figure 4-18. Removing the cover printer Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 112

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.10 Housing side right

Rear
When disassembling, be careful not to apply excessive force on the
hook receiver at the upper center of the housing upper Assy. Doing
so could cause blanching or damage.

Right Hook receiver Housing upper Assy

Right

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove two screws.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (Black) ( ): 2 screws (6±1 Kgf·cm)
7. Release the three hooks on the upper part of the housing side right and remove it in
the direction of the arrow. Housing side right Panel FFC Hook

Figure 4-19. Removing the housing side right

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 113

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When reassembling, be careful not to pinch the panel FFC.

Panel FFC

 Location of the hooks of the Housing side right are shown below.

Housing side right Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 114

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.11 Housing side left Left

When disassembling, be careful not to apply excessive force on the

hook receiver at the upper center of the housing upper Assy. Doing
so could cause blanching or damage.

Left Housing upper Assy Hook receiver

Housing side left

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
Rear Front left
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove two screws.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (Black) ( ): 2 screws (6±1 Kgf·cm)
7. Remove the hooks at the two locations on the upper part of the housing side left Housing side front
and remove it in the direction of the arrow.

When the housing side left is detached, the housing side front is
Hook
detached together. When reassembling, do not forget to put them
back. Figure 4-20. Removing the housing side left

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 115

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Location of the hooks of the Housing side left are shown below.

Housing side left Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 116

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.12 Panel Assy

1. Open the cover printer Assy.
2. Remove the panel holder and slightly draw out the panel FFC.

Panel holder Panel FFC

Cover printer Assy

Panel Assy
Figure 4-21. Removing the panel Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 117

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3. Lean the panel Assy until it becomes horizontal with the top surface of the housing Back side of panel Assy
upper Assy, and then remove the two screws.
Cover panel FFC Panel Assy
 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 2 screws (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Housing upper Assy Panel Assy

Figure 4-22. Removing the panel Assy (2)

Speaker cable Grounding wire Panel FFC Panel Assy
4. Remove the cover panel FFC on the back side of the panel Assy and disconnect
the panel FFC and the speaker cable.
5. Remove the screw to remove the grounding wire inside the panel Assy and then
remove the panel Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x4 ( ): 1 screw (6±1 Kgf·cm)

Figure 4-23. Removing the panel Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 118

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.13 Housing upper Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the three screws on the upper side of the housing upper Assy and the two
screws on the back side.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 3 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Housing upper Assy

Figure 4-24. Removing the housing upper Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 119

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

10. Release the hook and remove the sensor detector cover printer from the housing
upper Assy.
11. Lift the housing upper Assy upward to remove it from the printer mechanism.

Sensor Detector Cover Printer

Hook

Housing upper Assy

Figure 4-25. Removing the housing upper Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 120

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.14 Stacker Assy (SC-P900 only)

1. Stand the printer with the rear side down.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the stacker stopper.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (TBD Kgf·cm)
3. Pull out the stacker Assy to the front to remove it.

Front Stacker stopper Front Stacker stopper

Bottom

Stacker Assy

Figure 4-26. Removing the Stacker Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 121

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.15 Stacker (13") (SC-P700 only)

1. Stand the printer with the rear side down.
2. Remove the four screws that secure the stacker sub front and remove the stacker
sub front.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (black) ( ): 4 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)
3. Pull out the stacker (13”) to the front to remove it.

Front

Stacker

Bottom Stacker sub front

Figure 4-27. Removing the Stacker (13")

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 122

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.16 Holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy

1. Stand the printer with the rear side down.
2. Draw out the stacker.
3. Remove the three screws and release the two hooks to remove the holder, porous
pad, paper guide, lower Assy.
 SHAFT,MOUNT PLATE,CR-3C ( ): 3 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)
Bottom Stacker
Make sure to secure the holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower
Assy with the hooks before securing it with the screws.

Holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy Hook

Figure 4-28. Removing the holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 123

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.17 Damper Rear right of housing upper Assy Damper Cut washer
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the cut washer to remove the combination gear.

Make sure that the combination gear is securely fixed with the cut
washer. Combination gear

Back Damper

11. Release and remove the two hooks of the damper from the back of the housing
upper Assy.

Hook

Figure 4-29. Removing the damper

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 124

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.3.18 Housing lower Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the ink supply Assy. (→P. 180)
11. Remove the Holder CSIC connector. (→P. 198)
12. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-30. Removing the housing lower Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 125

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red) CN209
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
CN206
14. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
15. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy, and release them
from the five clamps.
 Detector roll unit (CN208: Black) CN208 CN502
 Detector front tray (CN206: Blue) Main board Assy
 Detector stacker (CN209: Orange)
 Secondary side power supply (CN502: White)
 Roll unit connector (CN216: White) (SC-P900 only)
CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-31. Removing the housing lower Assy (2)

CN216
16. Release the ink leak sensor cable from the frame top right.

Frame top right

Ink leak sensor cable

Figure 4-32. Removing the housing lower Assy (3)
Clamp

Figure 4-33. Removing the housing lower Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 126

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

17. Remove the two screws of the roll unit connector. (SC-P900 only)
 TBD ( ): 2 pcs

Roll unit connector cannot be removed, but removing the screws

are necessary for removing the Housing lower Assy from the main
frame.

18. Remove the detector front tray. (→P. 233)

Roll unit connector

Figure 4-34. Removing the housing lower Assy (5)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 127

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

19. Remove the six screws of the housing lower Assy.

Left Right
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Front

Rear

Figure 4-35. Removing the housing lower Assy (6)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 128

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

20. Lift the rear part of the printer mechanism and pull out the cables that were
disconnected from the main board Assy in Step 15 from the cable holders on the
left rear part of the printer mechanism.
21. Since the housing lower Assy interfere with the tray front, separate the housing
lower Assy and the printer mechanism while avoiding the interfering point (Figure
4-36).

Make sure the three dowels of the housing lower Assy are inserted
in the dowel holes of the main frame.

Main frame

Cable holder
Tray front
Housing lower Assy Dowel hole and dowel

Printer mechanism Housing lower Assy Interfering point

Figure 4-36. Removing the housing lower Assy (7)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 129

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4 Major parts: electrical components

4.4.4.1 IS sub board Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove all connectors and FFCs on the IS sub board Assy.
11. Remove the four screws and remove the IS sub board Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (4±1 Kgf·cm)

IS sub board Assy

Figure 4-37. Removing the IS sub board Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 130

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.2 CRCM board Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the four screws of the CRCM shield plate and remove the CRCM shield
plate.
 C.B.S. 2.5x4 ( ): 4 pcs (4±0.5 Kgf·cm) Step 10 Step 11, Step 12 CRCM board Assy

11. Disconnect all the FFCs connected to the CRCM board Assy.
12. Remove the four screws of the CRCM board Assy and remove the CRCM board
Assy.
 C.B.S. 2.5x4 ( ): 4 pcs (4±1 Kgf·cm)

CRCM shield plate

Figure 4-38. Removing the CRCM board Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 131

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.3 WiFi board Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-39. Removing the WiFi board Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 132

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
Mounting plate fan Assy WiFi board Assy
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Remove the screw from the WiFi board Assy and remove it from the mounting
plate fan Assy.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Figure 4-41. Removing the WiFi board Assy (3)

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-40. Removing the WiFi board Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 133

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.4 Fan Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-42. Removing the fan Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 134

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Release the two hooks of the mounting plate fan Assy and remove the fan from the Hook
mounting plate fan Assy.

When assembling the fan, assemble it in the orientation in which

the label faces upward.

Label

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Fan Assy

Figure 4-44. Removing the fan Assy (3)

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-43. Removing the fan Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 135

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.5 Main board Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-45. Removing the main board Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 136

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Disconnect all the FFCs from the main board Assy.
14. Remove the two screws from the shield main Assy and slide it in the direction of
the arrow to release the hook. Hook

 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm) Main board Assy

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-46. Removing the main board Assy (2)

Shield main Assy

Figure 4-47. Removing the main board Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 137

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Remove the two screws of the frame top left.

 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
16. Slightly lift the frame top left and slide the main board Assy in the direction of the
arrow to remove it.

Frame top left

Main board Assy

Figure 4-48. Removing the main board Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 138

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.6 LED board Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Screw A
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117) Cover LED PCB Screw B
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the cover LED PCB.

Because the cover LED PCB is affixed with double-sided tape,

when reassembling use new tape if the fixing power of the existing
tape has weakened.

11. Remove the screws of the LED board Assy.

12. (SC-P900: 3 pcs, SC-P700: 2 pcs)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
LED board Assy Tray ink detect Double-sided tape
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm) (SC-P900 only)
Figure 4-49. Removing the LED board Assy (1)
 Remove the screw A using a stubby screwdriver.
 Do not apply too much downward force when removing the
screw B. Doing so could lead to bending damage of tray ink
detect.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 139

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Slide the holder LED in the direction of the arrow to remove it, and remove the
LED board Assy from the holder LED.

Holder LED LED board Assy

Connector

Figure 4-50. Removing the LED board Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 140

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the holder LED to the LED board Assy,  Make sure the holder LED is not stranded on the tray ink
make sure to properly secure with the hooks at the two detect.
locations.
LED board Assy
 Route the in the groove of the holder LED.
Cable LED board Assy Holder LED

Hook
Groove
 Align the dowel with the dowel hole to fix the position of the
LED board Assy.

Tray ink detect

Dowel hole

LED board Assy Dowel

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 141

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.7 Power supply Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the roll paper 13 Assy. (SC-P700 only) (→P. 105) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
3. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
4. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
6. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
7. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
8. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
10. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
11. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-51. Removing the power supply Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 142

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

12. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN502
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
13. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
14. Disconnect the secondary side PS cable from the main board Assy (CN502:
White), and release the cable from the clamp.

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-52. Removing the power supply Assy (2)

Clamp

Figure 4-53. Removing the power supply Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 143

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Stand the printer with the rear side down.

Bottom
16. Remove the stacker Assy. (→P. 121) (SC-P900 only)
17. Remove the stacker (13”). (→P. 122) (SC-P700 only)
18. Remove the screw of the cover harness PS 1st to remove the cover harness PS 1st.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)

Cover harness PS 1st

Figure 4-54. Removing the power supply Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 144

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

19. Remove the two screws of the inlet Assy, release the hook on the upper surface Bottom
and then remove the inlet Assy from the bottom of the printer.
SC-P700 Cover harness PS 2nd
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 2 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)
20. Remove the two screws of the PS Assy, and remove the PS Assy and cover
harness PS 2nd.
 C.B.S. 3x10 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

The number of the cover harness PS 2nd differs between the

models.
 SC-P900: 2 pcs
 SC-P700: 1 pc
SC-P900

Do not change the surface where the printer is placed with the PS
Assy removed since the internal nut could fall into the printer.

Cover harness PS 2nd

1. Assemble the cover harness PS 2nd. Make sure the hook is

engaged with the hole in the cover PS.
2. Hold the cover harness PS 2nd with the cover harness PS 1st PS Assy
when screwing.

Rear left

Inlet Assy

Hook Dowel hole

Figure 4-55. Removing the power supply Assy (5)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 145

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.4.8 High voltage board Assy

CN104
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the housing lower Assy. (→P. 125)
11. Disconnect the cable of the high voltage board Assy from the main board Assy
(CN104: White), and release the cable from the two clamps.

Clamp

Figure 4-56. Removing the high voltage board Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 146

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

12. Remove the screw and remove the secondary side cable of the high voltage board
Bottom of printer mechanism
Assy.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)
13. Release the secondary side cable of the high voltage board Assy and the cable of
the motor PF Assy from the two clamps on the bottom of the printer mechanism.
14. Release the cable of the motor PF Assy from the holder high voltage.

Secondary side cable

Secondary side cable of

Motor PF Assy cable
high voltage board Assy

Figure 4-57. Removing the high voltage board Assy (2)

Holder high voltage Clamp

Figure 4-58. Removing the high voltage board Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 147

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Remove the two screws of the holder high voltage and then remove the holder
high voltage.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Rear left

Holder high voltage

Figure 4-59. Removing the high voltage board Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 148

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5 Major parts: carriage mechanism Mounting plate fan Assy

4.4.5.1 APG Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115) Mounting plate fan Assy

8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)

9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-60. Removing the APG Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 149

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN202 CN305
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Disconnect the detector APG Assy cable and the motor APG cable from the main
board Assy (CN202: White, CN305: Blue).

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-61. Removing the APG Assy (2)

Figure 4-62. Removing the APG Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 150

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Remove the FFC from the APG encoder.

15. Remove the two screws from the frame top right.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
16. Remove the five screws of the APG Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)
17. Remove the APG Assy while slightly lifting the frame top right in the direction of
the arrow. Frame top right Rear right

APG Assy

Back

APG encoder

Figure 4-63. Removing the APG Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 151

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the APG Assy, align it with the boss.  Align the phase of the APG unit gear.
 Make sure the D/E change planet Assy shaft is in the hole in the  Check the position of the gear shaft release.
APG Assy.

D/E change planet Assy shaft

Gear shaft release APG unit gear

Hole

APG Assy Boss

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 152

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.2 Print head

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115) Guide FFC head
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the three fixing screws of the cover CR and remove the cover CR.
 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 3 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
11. Remove the two fixing screws of the support guide tube and remove the support
guide tube. Cover CR

 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm) Support guide tube

12. Remove the two fixing screws of the guide FFC head and remove the guide FFC
head.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

When assembling the guide FFC head, make sure to secure the
head FFC with the hook of the guide FFC head. Figure 4-64. Removing the print head (1)

Guide FFC head Head FFC

Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 153

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Remove the three fixing screws of the cover valve Assy and remove the cover
valve Assy.
 C.P. 2.5x6 ( ): 3 pcs (3±0.5 Kgf·cm) 3 1

 Temporary place the cover valve Assy on the upper part of the
ink supply Assy. Make sure to protect the printer from the ink
with cloth or the like.
 Be careful not to bend or deform the tube guide.

Cover valve Assy Tube guide

Cover valve Assy

Ink supply Assy

Figure 4-65. Removing the print head (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 154

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

When attaching the cover valve Assy to the print head, make sure  Tighten the screw in the order shown in Figure 4-65.
to perform the following operations.  Make sure the cover valve Assy is firmly inserted.
 Apply CR02 on the seal rubber parts of the cover valve Assy Measure the gap between the CR Assy and the transparent
and the needle parts of the print head before assembling. plate of the cover valve Assy and confirm the gap width is in the
standard range.
If not, loosen the three screws securing the cover valve Assy
and check the insertion state again.
Standard: 3.4 mm to 4.3 mm

CR Assy

Print head Cover valve Assy

Transparent plate

Application point

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 155

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Remove the three screws of the print head.

Make sure the head FFC is not dangling in between the joint part of
 C.B.B. (P2) 2.5x6 ( ): 2 pcs (3±0.5 Kgf·cm) the CR Assy and APG Assy.

 C.B.B. (P2) (with washer) 2.5x6 ( ): 1 pc (3±0.5 Kgf·cm) Head FFC

with washer

 Tighten the screw in the order shown in the figure below.

15. Lift the print head upwards and disconnect the four head FFCs, then remove the
print head.

Make sure to insert/extract the FFC vertically. If not, terminal

inside the connector may get damaged, short circuit may occur,
FFC may break, or elements on the board may break.

Joint part

2 1

Head FFC

Print head
Figure 4-66. Removing the print head (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 156

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.3 Scale CR
Mounting plate scale CR right
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115) Scale CR
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the tension of the torsion spring and remove the hook of the torsion spring
from the hole of the scale CR.
11. Shift the scale CR to the right and remove it from the mounting plate scale CR
right.
12. Disconnect the scale CR from the CR Assy and remove it from the holder scale
CR left.

Torsion spring Mounting plate scale CR left

Scale CR

Figure 4-67. Removing the scale CR

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 157

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the scale CR, make sure the part with the
corner cut off is at the top left side.

Scale CR
 When routing the scale CR through the CR Assy, route it in the
point shown in the figure below.

CR Assy

Route scale CR through

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 158

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.4 Pulley driven Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
Frame top right Rear right
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the two screws from the frame top right.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
11. Remove the five screws of the APG Assy. APG Assy

 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)
12. Remove the APG Assy while slightly lifting the frame top right in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-68. Removing the pulley driven Assy (1)
When removing the APG Assy, disconnecting the detector APG
cable and motor APG cable from the main board Assy (CN202:
White, CN305: Blue) is not needed. Also, disconnecting the FFC
from the APG encoder is not needed, too.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 159

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Release the extension spring 26.7 from the two hooks, and slide the holder pulley
driven CR in the direction of the red arrow to loosen the CR belt. Rear Extension spring 26.7

14. Remove the pulley driven Assy from the holder pulley driven CR along the groove
in the direction of the blue arrow.
15. Remove the CR belt from the Pulley driven Assy.

When attaching the pulley driven Assy to the holder pulley driven
CR, make sure to align the rib of the pulley driven Assy with the
groove of the holder pulley driven CR.

Holder pulley driven CR

Hook

Rear Right Holder pulley driven CR

Pulley driven Assy Rib and groove

CR Belt Pulley driven Assy

Figure 4-69. Removing the pulley driven Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 160

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.5 Motor CR Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-70. Removing the motor CR Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 161

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN301
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Disconnect the motor CR Assy cable from the main board Assy (CN301: White)
and release the cable from the clamp.
14. Loosen the CR belt. (→P. 160)

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-71. Removing the motor CR Assy (2)

Clamp

Figure 4-72. Removing the motor CR Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 162

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Remove the CR belt from the pinion gear of the motor CR Assy.
Motor CR Assy Holder scale CR left CR belt
16. Remove the one fixing screw of the holder scale CR left and remove the holder
scale CR left, torsion spring and scale CR.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (TBD Kgf·cm)

Torsion spring Scale CR

Figure 4-73. Removing the motor CR Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 163

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

17. Remove the four screws of the ink supply Assy.

 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
18. Remove the screw of the frame top right.
Frame top right
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
19. Move the ink supply Assy in the direction of the arrow to make yourself possible
to access the screw which securing the motor CR Assy.

When moving the ink supply Assy, do not place it on the tray front.
Doing so may deform the link part of the tray front. Motor CR Assy

Ink supply Assy Tray front

Figure 4-74. Removing the motor CR Assy (5)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 164

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

20. Remove the two screws of the motor CR Assy and remove the motor CR Assy.
 C.C.S. 3x4 ( ): 2 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)

Motor CR Assy

Figure 4-75. Removing the motor CR Assy (6)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 165

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.6 Head FFC Assy

Rear Holder FFC
To prevent head FFC avoiding the CR Assy operation and affect
the printing quality, the head FFC is secured with pieces of double
sided tape in the determined position.
When handling the head FFC, be careful not to bend and fix the
FFC in the orientation different from the original. Also, do not peel
off and change the position of double-sided tape pasting the head
FFCs.

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

Hook
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111) Acetate tape

4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)

5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117) Ferrite core
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136)
11. Remove the print head. (→P. 153)
12. Peel off the acetate tape pasted on the holder FFC, release the hook at one location
and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
Head FFC Assy
If pieces of acetate tape cannot be reused, prepare three pieces of
acetate tape (18 mm x 55 mm). Figure 4-76. Removing the head FFC Assy

Attach the ferrite core to the new head FFC Assy.

13. Remove the head FFC Assy from the main frame.
14. Remove the two ferrite cores and the holder FFC from the head FFC Assy.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 166

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the guide FFC head, wrap the acetate tape  Check point
around head FFC as following. ・Wrap the acetate tape start from the bottom edge of the
 Preparation FFC.
・Work with the CR cover removed. ・Wrap the acetate tape to the FFC for only once.
・Prepare one piece of acetate tape ・Wrap the acetate tape around the head FFC and the cable,
(Width x length: 18mm x46mm) carriage, SUB together.
 Procedure
Wrap the acetate tape around the FFC at a position 110mm
from the rear corner of the cover valve assy.

Distance from rear corner of cover valve assy.

110mm
Head FFC Assy

Bottom edge of the FFC Cable, carriage, SUB

Cover valve Assy

Acetate tape : W:18mmｘL:46mm (Each front and rear side :
Measuring point of acetate tape wrapping position 23mm (Total 46mm))
Note: Attach the acetate tape starts from the bottom edge of the
FFC and completes one round of the FFC.

Acetate tape wrapping position

Acetate tape wrapping position

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 167

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the guide FFC head, make sure to secure the
head FFC with the hook of the guide FFC head.

Guide FFC head Head FFC

Hook
 Make sure the head FFC is not dangling in between the joint
part of the CR Assy and APG Assy.

Head FFC

Joint part

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 168

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.7 CR Assy
Extension spring
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
Frame top right
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113) Slider transmission Hook
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the print head. (→P. 153)
11. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
12. Remove the pulley driven Assy. (→P. 159)
13. Remove the screw of the mounting plate scale CR right and remove the scale CR
and mounting plate scale CR right.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
14. Release the extension spring from the two hooks and remove the spring.
15. Slide and remove the slider transmission in the direction of the arrow.
Scale CR
16. Remove the two screws from the frame top right and evacuate the frame top right
upwards.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate scale CR right

Figure 4-77. Removing the CR Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 169

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

17. Remove the CR belt from the pinion gear of the motor CR Assy.
CR Frame CR Assy Head FFC

CR??????????
Pinion gear of motor CR Assy CR belt

Head FFC

Figure 4-78. Removing the CR Assy (2)

18. Extend the head FFC all the way to the right end. Slide the CR Assy to the right to
remove it from the CR frame, and then remove the CR Assy.

CR Assy CR Frame

Figure 4-79. Removing the CR Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 170

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 To avoid grease attaching to the CR belt, put it in the CR Assy.  When routing the scale CR through the CR Assy, route
 Since the CR belt is needed to be attached with the motor CR through the position shown in the figure below.
Assy and the pulley driven Assy, make sure to route it on the
rear side of the CR Assy. CR Assy
 Extend the head FFC all the way to the right end and routed
behind the CR Assy. (see Figure 4-78)
 When attaching the CR Assy to the CR frame, slightly widen
the CR sub Assy and make space to insert the CR frame in
between the CR sub Assy and the CR main Assy.

Route the upper side of the CR belt through

Route the scale CR through

CR main Assy CR frame CR sub Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 171

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 When assembling the guide FFC head, make sure to secure the
head FFC with the hook of the guide FFC head.

Guide FFC head Head FFC

Hook
 Make sure the head FFC is not dangling in between the joint
part of the CR Assy and APG Assy.

Head FFC

Joint part

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 172

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.8 CR belt
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the print head. (→P. 153)
11. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
12. Remove the CR Assy. (→P. 169)
13. Release the fixing plate holder belt from the three hooks and remove it.
CR belt Fixing plate holder belt Hook
Since the hook securing the fixing plate holder belt easily break, be
Boss
careful not to damage the hook when removing/attaching the fixing
plate holder belt. Figure 4-80. Removing the CR belt (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 173

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Remove the CR belt from the belt holder on the backside of the CR Assy.
CR Assy

Make sure to check the following points when installing the CR

belt.
 Set the CR belt so that its lumpy side faces inward.
 Put the both-sides-lumpy part of the CR belt into the belt
holding part of the CR Assy.

Inner side: lumpy Both sides Inner side: lumpy

Outer side: flat lumpy part Outer side: flat

Belt holding part

 When attaching the fixing plate holder belt, make sure the
claws of the fixing plate holder belt are hooked to the bosses
and the fixing plate holder belt is firmly secured.

CR belt Belt holder

Figure 4-81. Removing the CR belt (2)

Claw and boss

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 174

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.5.9 Detector PW Grounding plate head left

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the print head. (→P. 153)
11. Remove the screw of the grounding plate head left and evacuate the grounding
plate head left upwards.
 C.B.B. 2.5x4 ( ): 1 pc (2±0.5 Kgf·cm)

 Be careful not to drop the washer.

 Be careful not to bend the grounding plate head left too much.

12. Peel off the double-sided tape from the detector PW FFC and remove the detector
PW from the dowels.
13. Disconnect the detector PW FFC from the detector PW and remove the detector
PW.

When reassembling, the detector PW shall be secured by aligning

to the dowel of the CR Assy.

Detector PW Detector PW FFC Double-sided tape

Dowel

Figure 4-82. Removing the detector PW

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 175

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6 Major parts: ink system mechanism Mounting plate fan Assy

4.4.6.1 Motor decomp Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115) Mounting plate fan Assy

8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)

9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy to shift it in the direction of
the arrow.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-83. Removing the motor decomp Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 176

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN 303
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
12. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
13. Disconnect the motor decomp Assy cable from the main board Assy (CN303:
Yellow) and release the cable from the frame top right.

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-84. Removing the motor decomp Assy (2)

Rear right

Motor decomp Assy cable Frame top right

Figure 4-85. Removing the motor decomp Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 177

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Disconnect the tube from the right side of the tube insertion point, and release the
Front right Tube insertion point Tube Buffer unit Shield plate board
tube from the two hooks of the buffer unit.

 Make sure to fully insert the tube.

 Make sure to secure the cable with the two hooks of the buffer
unit.

15. Remove the two screws of the shield plate board and evacuate the shield plate
board and IS sub board Assy.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)

IS sub board Assy

Hook
Clamp
Figure 4-86. Removing the motor decomp Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 178

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

16. While avoiding the shield plate board and IS sub board Assy removed in Step 15,
remove the three screws of the motor decomp Assy and the screw of the ground
plate, and remove the motor decomp Assy.
 C.B.S. P4 3x10 ( ): 3 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Motor decomp Assy

Ground plate
Figure 4-87. Removing the motor decomp Assy (5)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 179

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6.2 Ink supply Assy

When replacing the ink supply Assy, make sure to change the MAC
address label pasted on the main duct plate.

MAC address label Main duct plate

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the LED board Assy. (→P. 139)
11. Remove the CRCM board Assy. (→P. 131)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 180

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

12. Remove all connectors and FFCs on the IS sub board Assy, remove the two screws
Front right IS sub board Assy Shield plate board
and then remove the IS sub board Assy together with the shield plate board.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
13. Remove the motor decomp Assy. (→P. 176)

If not replacing the motor decomp Assy, disconnecting the motor

decomp Assy cable from the main board Assy (CN303: Yellow) is
not needed when removing the decomp motor Assy.

Figure 4-88. Removing the ink supply Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 181

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Peel off the two FFCs between the CRCM board Assy and main board Assy from
the upper surface of the ink supply Assy.
15. Remove the four screws of the ink supply Assy.
Frame top right
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
16. Remove the frame top front.
17. Remove the screw of the frame top right.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)

FFC Frame top right

Ink supply Assy

Figure 4-89. Removing the ink supply Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 182

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

18. Remove the three screws of the cover CR and remove the cover CR.
 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 3 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
19. Remove the two screws of the support guide tube and remove the support guide
tube.
 C.B.P. 3x10 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
Head tilt adjustment lever Head tilt adjustment lever
Work carefully so as not to damage the tube guide.
Guide FFC head Head FFC

20. Remove the two screws of the guide FFC head and remove the guide FFC head.
 C.B.P. 3x8 (black) ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
Tube guide Cover CR
 Work carefully so as not to damage the head FFC.
 Make sure not to change the position of the head tilt Support guide tube
adjustment lever.

Figure 4-90. Removing the ink supply Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 183

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

21. Remove the three fixing screws of the cover valve Assy and remove the cover
valve Assy.
 C.P. 2.5x6 ( ): 3 pcs (3±0.5 Kgf·cm) 3 1

 Temporary place the cover valve Assy on the upper part of the
ink supply Assy. Make sure to protect the printer from the ink
with cloth or the like.
 Be careful not to bend or deform the tube guide.

Cover valve Assy Tube guide

Cover valve Assy

Ink supply Assy

Figure 4-91. Removing the ink supply Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 184

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

When attaching the cover valve Assy to the print head, make sure  Tighten the screw in the order shown in Figure 4-91.
to perform the following operations.  Make sure the cover valve Assy is firmly inserted.
 Apply CR02 on the seal rubber parts of the cover valve Assy Measure the gap between the CR Assy and the transparent
and the needle parts of the print head before assembling. plate of the cover valve Assy and confirm the gap width is in the
standard range.
If not, loosen the three screws securing the cover valve Assy
and check the insertion state again.
Standard: 3.4 mm to 4.3 mm

CR Assy

Print head Cover valve Assy

Transparent plate

Application point

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 185

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

22. Shift the right side of the ink supply Assy in the direction of the arrow to avoid the
Cover valve Assy Frame top right
frame top right, and remove the cover valve Assy and ink supply Assy.
23. Remove the two torsion springs at the lower part of the ink supply Assy.

Be careful not to drop the torsion springs at the lower part of the
ink supply Assy.

Ink supply Assy

Torsion spring Torsion spring

Hook
Figure 4-92. Removing the ink supply Assy (5)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 186

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Make sure the rear end of the torsion springs are hooked on the
hook of the frame of the ink supply Assy.
 Make sure the two torsion springs are on the specified position.
(reuse the springs to the new ink supply Assy)
 Torsion spring (1): Between the two holes
 Torsion spring (2): In the groove

Torsion spring (1) Torsion spring (2)

EJ Starwheel Assy Hole

Groove
 Tube guide Assy is not included in the ink supply Assy. Reuse
or attach the new tube guide Assy according to the assembling
procedure on (→P. 190).

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 187

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6.3 Tube guide Assy

Holder guide tube Grounding guide tube
When the tube guide Assy is used again, remove it using the
following procedure.

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115) Ink supply Assy

8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)

Ink tube Sheet protection tube inner
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the ink supply Assy. (→P. 180)
11. Remove the screw of the holder guide tube, slide it in the direction of the arrow
and remove it from the ink supply Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x4 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)
12. Remove the grounding guide tube and remove the holder guide tube from the ink
tube.
13. Release the hook at one location and remove the tube guide. Tube guide Hook
Figure 4-93. Removing the tube guide Assy (1)
14. Release the hooks of the sheet protection tube inner at the two locations.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 188

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Release the hooks of the clamp tube head at two locations, and remove the
grounding plate CR and clamp tube head from cover valve Assy.
16. Remove the tube guide Assy from the ink tube.

Ink tube

Clamp tube head

Grounding plate CR Cover valve Assy Tube guide Assy Hook

Figure 4-94. Removing the tube guide Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 189

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Assemble the tube guide Assy following the procedure given below. 3. Align the three hooks of the holder guide tube with the holes in
1. Insert the hook of the holder guide tube to the hole in the tube the main duct plate, slide the holder guide tube in the direction of
guide Assy and secure it. the arrow, and secure it with the screw.

2. Align the groove of the grounding guide tube with the rib of the
holder guide tube and attach the grounding guide tube. Holder guide tube

Holder guide tube

Holder guide tube Tube guide Assy

Hook
Hole
Screw
Grounding guide tube Hook and hole
Rib and groove

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 190

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4. When Replace [Clamp tube head] alone, assemble Tube guide 5. Secure the clamp tube head to the cover valve Assy with the two
Assy following procedure below. hooks of the clamp tube head. Make sure to align the two ribs of
the cover valve Assy with the two ribs of the clamp tube head.
1. Sheet protection Tube Inner (part of red dot)
2. Sheet Tube Outer
3. Tube Guide CR Clamp tube head
4. Grounding Plate Tube CR
5. Sheet Protection Outer (part of black dot)

Attach by sliding in the direction of the arrow while pressing the red
circled part of the figure.

Cover valve Assy Hook

Clamp tube head Rib
6. Secure the two hooks of the sheet protection tube inner.
7. Secure the hook of the tube guide.

Sheet protection tube inner

Tube guide Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 191

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6.4 Motor IS Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)

When removing the APG Assy, disconnecting the detector APG

cable and motor APG cable from the main board Assy (CN202:
White, CN305: Blue) is not needed. Also, disconnecting the FFC
from the APG encoder is not needed, too.

11. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy and shift it backwards.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-95. Removing the motor IS Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 192

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

12. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN304
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
13. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
14. Disconnect the motor IS cable from the main board Assy (CN304: Red), and
release the cable from the frame top right.

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-96. Removing the motor IS Assy (2)

Rear right Motor IS cable

Frame top right

Figure 4-97. Removing the motor IS Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 193

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Remove the FFC from the motor IS encoder, remove the one fixing screw of the
Rear right
motor IS Assy and remove the motor IS Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)

 When attaching the motor IS Assy, align it with the positioning

boss.
 make sure the end of the torsion spring of the ASF paper
stopper lever is on the attaching plate of the motor IS Assy.

Torsion spring

FFC Motor IS Assy

Motor IS encoder

End of the torsion spring is on the attaching plate Motor IS Assy Boss

Figure 4-98. Removing the motor IS Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 194

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6.5 Ink system Assy Rear right

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108) Waste ink tube
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117) Tube clamp
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
CSIC-FFC Main frame
10. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
When removing the APG Assy, disconnecting the detector APG
cable and motor APG cable from the main board Assy (CN202:
White, CN305: Blue) is not needed. Also, disconnecting the FFC
from the APG encoder is not needed, too.

11. Peel off the CSIC-FFC from the ink system Assy.
12. Unlock the CR lock.
13. Remove CR Assy from the top of the ink system Assy.
14. Remove the tube clamp to pull out the waste ink tube.
15. Remove the two fixing screws of the ink system Assy.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
16. To avoid the corner of the main frame, slide the ink system Assy in the direction of Housing lower Assy Ink leak sensor board Ink system Assy
the arrow, then pull out the ink system Assy while avoiding the main frame,
housing lower Assy, and ink leak sensor board to remove the ink system Assy. Double-sided tape
Interfering point
Since the space to remove the ink system Assy is narrow, avoid Figure 4-99. Removing the ink system Assy
main frame and housing lower Assy when removing the ink system
Assy. Interfering points are shown in Figure 4-99.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 195

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Attach the Ink System after turn the gear in the direction arrow to put [CR Lock], [Cap], [Wiper] down.

([CR Lock] and [Cap] are rising during ASP transportation)

Ink System Assy Gear

Correct state Wrong state CR Lock

Cap

Wiper

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 196

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Make sure to put the hooks of the ink system Assy at the two  There shall be no gap between the housing (the area next to the
locations into the holes. wiper) of the ink system Assy and the main frame.
 Make sure to fully insert the waste ink tube to the holder cable
Rear right Main frame CSIC.
 After secured the waste ink tube with the tube clamp, confirm
there is no slackness. (reuse the tube clamp to the new printer)

Main frame

No gap

Tube clamp

Hole

Holder cable CSIC Waste ink tube Ink system Assy

Ink system Assy Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 197

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.6.6 CSIC connector

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108) Waste ink tube

3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)

4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117) Holder cable CSIC Tube clamp

9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)

10. Remove the maintenance box.
11. Unlock the CR lock.
12. Remove CR Assy from the top of the ink system Assy.
13. Remove the tube clamp to pull out the waste ink tube.
14. Remove the two screws that secure the holder cable CSIC and slide the holder
cable CSIC in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
 C.B.P 3x10 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Maintenance box
Figure 4-100. Removing the holder CSIC connector (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 198

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. Release the hook at one location to remove the holder CSIC connector from the
holder cable CSIC. Back

16. Release the hooks at the both sides of the CSIC connector and slide it in the
direction of the arrow to remove it from the holder CSIC connector.
17. Remove the CSIC-FFC and remove the holder CSIC connector.
CSIC-FFC
Connect the CSIC-FC to the connector CSIC Assy in the direction
shown in the figure below.

CSIC connector Holder CSIC connector CSIC-FFC

Holder CSIC connector

CSIC connector

Hook

Figure 4-102. Removing the holder CSIC connector (3)

Holder cable CSIC

Figure 4-101. Removing the holder CSIC connector (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 199

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7 Major parts: paper feed mechanism Left

4.4.7.1 PF encoder Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
7. Remove the screw of the PF encoder Assy and FFC, and remove the PF encoder
Assy.
PF encoder Assy
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)

FFC

Figure 4-103. Removing the PF encoder Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 200

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.2 Belt PF Left

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
7. Remove the PF encoder Assy. (→P. 200)
8. Remove the belt PF from the EJ roller gear. PF roller gear Belt PF EJ roller gear

9. Remove the belt PF from the pinion gear of the Motor PF Assy.
10. Disengage the belt PF from the PF roller gear and remove the belt PF.

Pinion gear of the Motor PF Assy

Figure 4-104. Removing the belt PF

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 201

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.3 PE detector Assy

Holder detector PE
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Torsion spring
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136) Secure torsion spring to hook Hook
Rear
11. Remove the ASF Assy. (→P. 221)
12. Disengage the torsion spring from the hook of the holder detector PE.
13. Release the hook of the holder detector PE at one location and slide the PE
detector Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

 Check the position of the torsion spring.

 Make sure to secure the torsion spring to the hook of the holder
detector PE.

PE detector Assy
Figure 4-105. Removing the PE detector Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 202

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.4 AP detector Assy

AP detector Assy Cable
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136)
11. Release the cable from the hook. Hopper Assy

12. Remove the one fixing screw of the AP detector Assy and remove the AP detector
Assy. Access the screw from the screwdriver hole in the hopper Assy. Screwdriver hole

 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 1 pc (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Hook
Figure 4-106. Removing the AP detector Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 203

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Align the two bosses of holder detector AP with the holes in the  Insert the lever AP Sensor Assy in the hole in the hopper Assy
main frame. when attaching the AP detector Assy.

Main frame

Hopper Assy

Hole

Lever AP Sensor Assy

Holder detector AP Hole

Boss

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 204

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.5 Shaft release Assy

Holder detector PE
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136)
Torsion spring Hook
11. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
12. Remove the AP detector Assy. (→P. 203)
13. Remove the ASF Assy. (→P. 221)
14. Release the torsion spring from the hook of the holder detector PE.(→P. 202)

Figure 4-107. Removing the shaft release Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 205

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. remove the grounding spring shaft release, and remove the screw securing the
holder release shaft Assy to remove it.
Holder release right
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 6 pcs/4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
Number of the holder release shaft Assy differs between the
models.
 SC-P900: 6 pcs
 SC-P700: 4 pcs

Grounding
Groundingspring
springshaft
shaftrelease
release
16. Release the hook of the holder release right at one location, then remove the shaft
release Assy in the direction of the arrow. Hook

Be careful not to lose the parallel pin due to gear dislodging. Holder release shaft Assy Rear

Shaft release Assy

Figure 4-108. Removing the shaft release Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 206

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Engage the four hooks of the Holder release right with the holes  Attach the shaft release Assy with the release shaft gear facing
in the main frame. upward.
 Attach the grounding spring shaft release. (reuse the grounding
spring shaft release to the new printer)

Main frame

Release shaft gear Grounding spring shaft release

Holder release right

Hole
Hook

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 207

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.6 PGU Assy

Frame of the printer
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
Torsion spring
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
Rear
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136)
11. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
12. Remove the AP detector Assy. (→P. 203)
13. Remove the ASF Assy. (→P. 221)
14. Remove the shaft release Assy. (→P. 205)

To remove the PGU Assy at the center, remove the PE detector

PGU Assy
Assy. (→P. 202)
Front

Dowel

15. Remove the torsion spring from the hook of the frame of the printer.
Dowel
16. Lift the lower side of the PGU Assy to disengage the two dowels from the frame.
17. Remove the PGU Assy to the rear side.

PGU Assy

Figure 4-109. Removing the PGU Assy

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 208

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.7 EJ Starwheel Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
Guide tray front left
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the ink supply Assy. (→P. 180)
11. Release the hooks of the detector front tray at the two locations (bottom) and
remove the detector front tray.
12. Remove the two screws of the guide tray front left.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 2 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)
Detector front tray

Hook

Figure 4-110. Removing the EJ Starwheel Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 209

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Remove cut washers from both left and right link pin of the EJ Starwheel Assy.
EJ Starwheel Assy EJ Starwheel Assy
Be careful not to drop the cut washer.

Make sure to attach the cut washers on both left and right link pin.

Cut washer Cut washer

EJ Starwheel Assy

Figure 4-111. Removing the EJ Starwheel Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 210

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

14. Lift the guide tray front left and, while it is lifted, remove the EJ Starwheel Assy
Guide tray front left EJ Starwheel Assy
from the guide tray front left and link EJ left, and then remove the EJ Starwheel
Assy.

Reassemble in such a way that the left and right link pins of the EJ
Starwheel Assy are inserted into the holes of link EJ left and link
EJ right.

EJ Starwheel Assy

Link pin

Hole of link EJ right

Link EJ left

Figure 4-112. Removing the EJ Starwheel Assy (3)

Hole of link EJ left

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 211

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Insert the link pin on left and right sides of the EJ Starwheel Assy
in order of link EJ right then link EJ left shown in the figure below.

Hole Link EJ right Link EJ left Hole

EJ Starwheel Assy Link pin

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 212

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.8 Roller EJ front Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Bushing roller EJ Hole

2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)

3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119) Grounding spring EJ Hook
10. Remove the ink supply Assy. (→P. 180)
11. Remove the EJ Starwheel Assy. (→P. 209)
12. Remove the belt PF. (→P. 201)
13. Remove the grounding spring EJ.
14. Release the hook of the bushing roller EJ on the left side, rotate it in the direction
of the arrow to align it with the hole in the frame main Assy.

Frame main Assy

Figure 4-113. Removing the roller EJ front Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 213

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

15. While slightly lifting the guide tray front left, pull out the roller EJ front Assy from
the hole in the frame main Assy.

Hole

Roller EJ front Assy

Roller EJ front Assy

Frame main Assy Guide tray front left

Figure 4-114. Removing the roller EJ front Assy (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 214

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Make sure each rubber rollers of the roller EJ front Assy are in  Attach the grounding spring EJ in the orientation shown in the
front of the ribs of the PGF Assy. figure below. (reuse the grounding spring EJ to the new
printer)

Grounding spring EJ

Roller EJ front Assy Rubber roller

Around rubber roller

Roller EJ front Assy

Rib

Roller EJ front Assy

Rubber roller
Grounding spring EJ

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 215

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.9 PGF Assy

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111) Secondary side cable of
high voltage board Assy
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
PGU Assy
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the Holder, porous pad, paper guide, lower Assy. (→P. 123)
11. Remove the ink supply Assy. (→P. 180)
12. Remove the ink system Assy. (→P. 195)
13. Remove the EJ Starwheel Assy. (→P. 209)
14. Remove the roller EJ front Assy. (→P. 213)
15. Remove the screw and disconnect the secondary side cable of high voltage board
Assy.
Guide tray front left PGF Assy Hook
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm) Dowel
16. Remove the screw of the PGF Assy, shift the PGF Assy to the left, and remove the Figure 4-115. Removing the PGF Assy
hooks at the two locations (back) and the positioning dowels at the two locations.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 1 pc (6±1 Kgf·cm)
17. slightly lifting the guide tray front left, and remove the PGF Assy in the direction
of the arrow while avoiding the PGU Assy.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 216

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Diagonally insert the hooks of the PGF Assy into the hole in the
left side of the main frame, then set the PGF Assy in between
the left and right main frame.
 Insert the two hooks on the bottom of the PGF Assy into the
hole in the main frame, then slide the PGF Assy to the right
side.

PGF Assy (bottom)

Hook
Hole

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 217

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.10 Motor PF Assy

Mounting plate fan Assy
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107) Mounting plate fan Assy
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
Mounting plate fan Assy
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the housing lower Assy. (→P. 125)
11. Remove the belt PF.(→P. 201)
12. Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate fan Assy and shift it backwards.
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 4 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

Mounting plate fan Assy Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-116. Removing the motor PF Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 218

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Disconnect the cables listed below from the main board Assy.
CN302
 WiFi cable (CN102: Red)
 FAN cable (CN105: White)
 Panel FFC (CN201: Black)
 CR Sub FFC (CN501: White)
14. Remove the mounting plate fan Assy.
15. Disconnect the motor PF Assy cable from the main board Assy (CN302: Black),
and release the cable from the three clamps.

CN501 CN105 CN201 CN102

Mounting plate fan Assy

Figure 4-117. Removing the motor PF Assy (2)

Clamp

Figure 4-118. Removing the motor PF Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 219

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

16. Remove the ferrite core from the holder part.

17. Remove the two screws of the motor PF Assy and remove the motor PF Assy from Ferrite core

the bottom of the printer mechanism.

 C.C.S. 3x4 ( ): 2 pcs (6±1 Kgf·cm)

Reassemble so that the motor PF Assy terminal does not contact the Holder part
link EJ left.
Motor PF Assy
Link EJ left

Motor PF Assy Motor PF Assy terminal

Figure 4-119. Removing the motor PF Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 220

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.11 ASF Assy

Slider transmission Extension spring
1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113) Holder planet Assy Hook
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the APG Assy. (→P. 149)
11. Remove the motor IS Assy. (→P. 192)
12. Remove the main board Assy. (→P. 136)
13. Remove the AP detector Assy. (→P. 203)
14. Release the extension spring from the two hooks and remove the spring.
15. Slide the slider transmission in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
16. Remove the holder planet Assy.
17. Release all cables from the cable clamps at the left side of the ASF Assy.

Clamp

Figure 4-120. Removing the ASF Assy (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 221

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

18. Remove the six screws of the ASF Assy.

 C.B.S. 3x5 ( ): 1 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 3 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)
 C.B.P. 3x10( ): 2 pcs(6±1 Kgf·cm)

Left

ASF Assy

Rear

Figure 4-121. Removing the ASF Assy (2)

Figure 4-122. Removing the ASF Assy (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 222

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

19. Remove the grounding spring shaft LD.

20. Remove the holder shaft LD by removing each screw at the two locations. Front Front
 C.B.S. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs (8±1 Kgf·cm)

 Before removing the screw securing the holder shaft LD, mark
the current position of both left and right screw with a pen or
the like.

Holder shaft LD

Holder shaft LD
 Use the stubby screwdriver when removing/attaching the
holder shaft LD.

ASF Assy

Grounding spring shaft LD

Figure 4-123. Removing the ASF Assy (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 223

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

21. Shift the ASF Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

 If the ASF Assy interfere with the holder high voltage, slightly
move the ASF Assy to the home side and remove it.
 Be careful not to deform the attaching plate of the detector LD
roller.
 Detector LD roller will be removed together with the ASF Assy.
Make sure not to loose it since it is needed when replacing the
ASF Assy.

Detector LD roller ASF Assy

ASF Assy
Figure 4-124. Removing the ASF Assy (5)

Detector LD roller cable

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 224

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Parts to be reused when replacing the ASF Assy is listed below.

 Detector LD roller cable
 Grounding spring shaft LD
 Holder shaft LD
 Holder planet Assy
 When attaching the ASF Assy, make sure the three holes in the
ASF Assy are engaged with the dowels on the main frame.

Main frame

Dowel
 When attaching the holder shaft LD, make sure to attach it in
the marking position where marked before removing the
holder shaft LD.

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 225

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.4.7.12 Tray front

1. Remove the cover rear Assy. (→P. 107)
2. Remove the cover rear left. (→P. 108)
3. Remove the holder damper left Assy. (→P. 111)
4. Remove the holder damper right Assy. (→P. 111)
5. Remove the cover printer Assy. (→P. 112)
6. Remove the housing side right. (→P. 113)
Dowel
7. Remove the housing side left. (→P. 115)
8. Remove the panel Assy. (→P. 117)
9. Remove the housing upper Assy. (→P. 119)
10. Remove the housing lower Assy. (→P. 125)
11. Remove the EJ Starwheel Assy. (→P. 209)
12. Remove the two screws of the guide tray front left and remove the dowels at the
two locations.
 C.B.P. 3x10 ( ): 2 pcs
Guide tray front left
Figure 4-125. Removing the tray front (1)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 226

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Remove the two screws of the guide tray front right.
 C.B.P. 3x6 ( ): 2 pcs
14. Remove the grounding spring.
15. Remove the E ring that secures the spur gear to remove the spur gear and the
parallel pin.

Make sure not to loose the spur gear, parallel pin, and E ring since
they are needed when replacing the tray front.

Guide tray front right

Frame E ring Grounding spring

16. Release the hooks of the guide tray front right at the two locations.

Spur gear

Hook

Parallel pin

Figure 4-126. Removing the tray front (2)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 227

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

17. Remove the guide tray front left from the frame upward, then remove the tray front
Assy in the direction of the arrow.

Frame Guide tray front left

Tray front Assy

Figure 4-127. Removing the tray front (3)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 228

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

18. Remove the two extension springs of the tray assist Assy by removing each of the
hooks at the two locations, respectively. Cut washer Guide tray front right

19. Remove the two cut washers from the shaft of the tray assist Assy on the link EJ
right.

Make sure not to loose the cut washer since they are needed when
replacing the tray front.

Link EJ right
20. Remove the two cut washers from the shaft of the tray assist Assy on the link EJ
Back
left. Extension spring

Make sure not to loose the cut washer since they are needed when
replacing the tray front.

21. Remove the E ring and the cut washer from the shaft of the tray front, and remove
Tray assist Assy Tray front Tray assist Assy
the tray front and tray assist Assy.
Guide tray front left Cut washer

Washer E ring Link EJ left

Figure 4-128. Removing the tray front (4)

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 229

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Insert the two shafts of the tray front and the shaft of the tray  Insert the two shafts of the tray front and the shaft of the tray
assist Assy into the groove of the guide tray front left. assist Assy into the groove of the guide tray front right.
 Attach the washer on the shaft of the tray front and secure it  Attach the cut washer on the shaft of the tray assist Assy to
with the E ring. secure it.
 Attach the cut washer on the shaft of the tray assist Assy to  Attach the link EJ right and secure it with the cut washer.
secure it.  Set the extension spring on the hook.
 Attach the link EJ left and secure it with the cut washer.
 Set the extension spring on the hook. Cut washer Guide tray front right

Guide tray front left Cut washer

Link EJ right Shaft of tray front

Shaft of tray assist Assy
washer E ring Link EJ left
Extension spring
Shaft of tray front
Shaft of tray assist Assy

Extension spring

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 230

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Attach the right side of the tray front Assy according to the  Do not let the link EJ left, motor PF cable, and the secondary
holes in the frame base from the upper side of the frame base, side cable of the high voltage Assy interfere each other.
then attach the left side of the tray front Assy according to the
holes in the frame base. Secondary side cable of high voltage Assy Motor PF cable Link EJ left

Frame base

Tray front Assy

Dowel and hole

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 231

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Tighten the screws in the order of guide tray front left, guide
tray front right.
 Push in the tray front Assy fully.
 Attach the parallel pin and the spur gear 14.4 to the right shaft
of the tray front, and secure them with the E ring.
 Set the grounding spring 0.35 on the hook on the right side of
the frame base and the shaft of the tray front.

Guide tray front right

Guide tray front left

Parallel pin E ring Grounding spring 0.35

Spur gear 14.4

Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly/Assembly Procedure 232

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.5 Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit Detector Front Tray PF Encoder Assy./PF Scale
Roller PF
Left PF scale

Hole Bushing roller PF

PF roller

Left front Detector front tray

PF scale

PF encoder Assy. PF encoder Assy.

 Removing the PF scale once will cause the adhesive force of

double-sided tape to deteriorate. When the PF scale has been
removed, replace it with a new PF scale or remove the old
double-sided tape and affix new double-sided tape.
Housing lower Assy. Hook  The PF scale must be attached to the PF roll so that it is vertical
in respect to the PF roller.
Frame main Assy. The 2 hooks of the detector front tray must be properly fitted into  After attaching the PF encoder Assy., check that the PF scale is
the housing lower Assy. not contacting the PF encoder Assy.

IS Encoder

Frame

PF roller

PF scale IS encoder

PF encoder Assy.

IS encoder
PF roller Hook
Coating part
Hole
C.B.P-TITE SCREW, 3x4, F/ZN-3C (8 ±1Kgf/cm) Dowel

Remove the two screws and remove the IS encoder.

1. Release the hook of the bushing roller PF and rotate the bushing roller PF in the direction of the red arrow and align it with the hole in the frame
main Assy. Fit the 2 dowels on the IS encoder into the 2 holes in the frame.
2. Pull out the PF roller from the hole in the frame main Assy.

Disassembly and Assembly Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit 233
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

APG Sensor Detector LD Roller

CR Assy rear ASF Assy left

APG sensor cable

CR Assy
Sheet

APG sensor

Detector LD roller ASF detection flag

Double-sided tape
Hook
Hook

1. Release the 4 hooks and remove the APG sensor from the CR Assy. 1. Remove the sheet.
2. Disconnect the APG sensor cable and remove the APG sensor. 2. Release the 4 hooks and remove the detector LD roller.

The 4 hooks of the APG sensor must be properly fitted into the CR Assy. The ASF detection flag must pass through the center of the detector LD roller.

Sensor Detector Cover Printer Detector Stacker

Left Compression
Left front Plate brake panel spring 16.12

Sensor detector cover printer Detector stacker cable Detector stacker

Holder sensor
stacker

Bottom

Sensor detector cover printer cable

Housing lower Assy. Detector stacker Assy.

C.C.P-TITE SCREW, 3x10, F/ZB-3C (6 ±1 Kgf/cm)

Hook
C.C.P-TITE SCREW, 3x10, F/ZB-3C (6 ±1 Kgf/cm)
Hook
1. Remove 1 screw and remove the detector stacker Assy. from the housing lower Assy.
Remove the sensor detector cover printer by performing the following procedure. 2. Disconnect the detector stacker cable and remove the detector stacker Assy.
1. Release the hook and remove the sensor detector cover printer. 3. Remove 1 screw and remove the compression spring 16.12 and plate brake panel from the holder sensor stacker.
2. Remove the sensor detector cover printer from the sensor detector cover printer cable. 4. Release the 2 hooks and remove the detector stacker from the holder sensor stacker.

Disassembly and Assembly Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit 234
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Fan Filter Sheet Block Dust

Sheet Block Dust

Fan filter

Attach the Fan Filter by aligning the end with the dotted line as shown figure. Attach the Sheet Block Dust by aligning the end with the dotted line as shown figure. (Refer to the figure right for the attachment position)
Make sure that the red circle on the left figure is not floating.

Disassembly and Assembly Detailed Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure for each Part/Unit 235
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4.6 Routing FFCs/cables Holder AP Assy

Ink Supply Assy

Detector AP cable

CRCM VLM FFC CRCM V FFC CRCM Y FFC CRCM MK FFC CRCM PK FFC CRCM GY FFC

Holder release shaft Assy.

CRCM LC FFC CRCM VM FFC CRCM C FFC CRCM LGY FFC

Hook

Pass the detector AP cable through the four hooks of the holder AP Assy and three hooks of the holder release shaft Assy, and connect it to the main board
Assy.

Ink Supply Assy. CRCM board Assy.

PE Detector Assy

Double-sided tape
PE detector cable

Check the connector assignment shown below for connecting the FFC to the CRCM board Assy.
Also, secure the FFC as shown in the figure above.

CRCM board Assy. (left) CRCM board Assy. (right)

CN No. Name CN No. Name

1 CRCM FFC1 1 CRCM FFC2
2 CRCM VM FFC 2 CRCM C FFC
3 CRCM Y FFC 3 CRCM GY FFC
4 CRCM V FFC 4 CRCM LGY FFC PE Detector Assy Holder release shaft Assy
6 CRCM VLM FFC 6 CRCM PK FFC
7 CRCM LC FFC 7 CRCM MK FFC
Hook
Groove

Pass the PE detector cable through the groove of the PE detector Assy and three hooks of the holder release shaft Assy, and connect it to the main board Assy.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 236

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Housing Upper Assy (1) Panel Assy

Front right (back)

Hole

Speaker
Panel FFC
Hole

Housing upper Assy

Speaker cable

Grounding wire

Panel Assy

Connector
Panel board Connector
Hole

Speaker cable

The wiring of the panel Assy is as follows.

Hook 1. Pull out the panel FFC from the hole of the housing upper Assy and connect it to the connector of the panel board.
2. Pull out the speaker cable from the hole of the housing upper Assy and connect it to the connector of the panel board.
Pass the speaker cable through the hook and pull it out from the hole of the housing upper Assy and connect it to the panel board. 3. Pull out the grounding wire from the hole of the housing upper Assy and secure it with the screw.

Housing Upper Assy (2) Printer Mecha (1)

Rear left Left

Sensor detector cover printer Sensor detector cover printer Secondary side cable of the high voltage Assy C.B.P. 3x10

Ferrite core

Hole

Hole

Motor PF Assy cable

Housing upper Assy
 Pull out the secondary side cable of the high voltage Assy from the hole of the frame and secure it with the screw.
Pull out the sensor detector cover printer cable from the hole of the housing upper Assy and connect it to sensor detector cover printer.  Set the ferrite core at the position in the figure above and router the motor PF Assy cable to the bottom of the Printer Mecha. (Continued in Printer Mecha
(2) (p238))
Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 237
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Printer Mecha (2) Housing Lower Assy (1)

Bottom Left Roll unit connector cable Housing lower Assy.

Acetate tape

Hole

Detector front tray cable

Stacker sensor cable

Motor PF Assy. Secondary side cable of the high voltage Assy

Groove

 Secure the roll unit connector cable to the housing lower Assy with one piece of acetate tape.
 Pass the detector front tray cable and stacker sensor cable through the groove of the housing lower Assy and secure it with three pieces of acetate tape.

Housing Lower Assy (2)

Right Housing lower Assy.

Protection

Ink leak sensor board cable

Clamp
Hook
Holder high voltage Groove

 The wiring of the motor PF Assy cable is as follows.

1. Pass the cable through the hook and clamp.
Groove
2. Pass the cable through the hook and groove of the holder high voltage and route it to the top of the Printer Mecha.
 The wiring of the secondary side cable of the high voltage Assy is as follows. The wiring of the ink leak sensor board cable is as follows.
1. Pass the cable through the clamp and hook. 1. Pass the ink leak sensor board cable through the groove of the housing lower Assy.
2. Route the cable from the hole of the frame to the top of the Printer Mecha. 2. Affix the protection sheet from above the groove to secure the ink leak sensor board cable.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 238

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Power Supply Assy Head FFC Assy (1)

Bottom
Mounting plate fan Assy
CR sub FFC

Inlet cable

Hole

Ferrite core

Main board Assy

Ferrite core Power cable Housing lower Assy

Head FFC Assy

Head FFC Assy Holder FFC Ferrite core

Ferrite core

Tape

Acetate tape

Acetate tape

Power supply unit Cover PS Hook

The wiring at the rear of the head FFC Assy is as follows.

Projecting part 1. Pass the head FFC Assy through the holder FFC, and attach the holder FFC to the frame.
Groove
2. Attach the ferrite core to the head FFC Assy and secure the ferrite core with the two hooks of the holder FFC.
3. Secure the holder FFC with acetate tape.
 The wiring of the inlet cable is as follows.
4. Attach the ferrite core to the CR sub FFC.
1. Route the inlet cable along the projecting part of the housing lower Assy.
5. Secure the ferrite core with the three hooks of the mounting plate fan Assy.
2. Route the inlet cable through the groove of the housing lower Assy.
6. Connect the head FFC Assy to the main board Assy Check the connector assignment shown below for connecting the head FFC Assy to the main board
3. Pass the inlet cable through the groove of the cover PS.
Assy The connector numbers are printed on the head FFC. Connect the head FFC while confirming the connector numbers.
4. Set the ferrite core at the position shown in the figure above and secure it with tape.
5. Secure the inlet cable with acetate tape. CN No. Name
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
6. Connect the inlet cable to the power supply unit.
201 CR sub FFC
 The wiring of the power cable is as follows.
1. Pass the end of the power cable that has the ferrite core attached through the hole of the housing lower Assy and set the ferrite core at the position in the 401 Head FFC
figure above. 402 Head FFC
㻯㻺㻠㻜㻟

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻠

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻞

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻝
2. Route the power cable along the projecting part of the housing lower Assy 403 Head FFC
3. Route the inlet cable through the groove of the housing lower Assy
404 Head FFC
4. Pass the power cable between the power supply unit and cover PS and connect the power cable to the power supply unit.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 239

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Head FFC Assy (2) Top of the Printer

IS encoder FFC

Panel FFC
APG encoder FFC

CR sub FFC
FFC encoder PF

CR sub board Assy CSIC FFC

Guide FFC Frame CR Assy

Head FFC Assy

CRCM FFC1 CRCM FFC2 IS sub FFC Double-sided tape

Secure the following FFC with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above. Also, check the following connector assignment for connecting the FFC to the
main board Assy.
 IS sub FFC (main board Assy - IS sub board Assy)
 CSIC - FFC (main board Assy - connector CSIC Assy)
 CRCM FFC1 (main board Assy - CRCM board Assy (left))
 CRCM FFC2 (main board Assy - CRCM board Assy (right))
 IS encoder FFC (main board Assy - IS encoder)
 FFC encoder PF (main board Assy - PF encoder)
 APG encoder FFC (main board Assy - APG encoder)
 Panel FFC (main board Assy - panel Assy)

Main board Assy

㻯㻺㻞㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻜 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻝 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻞 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻟 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻠 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻝 CN Name (main board CN Name (IS sub board
No. Assy) No. Assy)
101 IS sub FFC 1 Main board Assy
㻯㻺㻠㻜㻟

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻠

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻞

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻝
㻯㻺㻟㻜㻡
210 CSIC-FFC 3 Ink leak sensor board 1
㻯㻺㻟㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻟 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻞 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻠 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻢
211 CRCM FFC1 4 Ink leak sensor board 2
212 CRCM FFC2 5 Ink leak sensor board 3
Head FFC Print head Head FFC IS sub board Assy
213 IS encoder FFC 6 Ink leak sensor board 4
The wiring at the front of the head FFC Assy is as follows. 㻯㻺㻝 214 FFC encoder PF 7 Ink end sensor board
1. Route the head FFC Assy between the frame and CR Assy. 215 APG encoder FFC
㻯㻺㻣

2. Connect the CR sub FFC to the CR sub board Assy.

㻯㻺㻠 㻯㻺㻟
501 Panel FFC
3. Connect the four head FFC to the print head (CN1/CN2/CN3/CN4).
㻯㻺㻢 㻯㻺㻡
4. Secure the head FFC to the hook of the guide FFC head.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 240

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Left Side of the Printer Rear Left of the Printer

Left 4

3
2
7

CRCM FFC2
FFC encoder PF
6
Roll unit connector cable
Detector roll unit (SC-P900 only)
cable
Stacker sensor cable
High voltage Assy cable
Hole ASF home detection sensor cable
1

5 Detector front tray cable

Motor CR Assy cable

Motor PF Assy cable
Double-sided tape
Secondary side power cable
Secure the following FFC with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above.
 CRCM FFC2
 FFC encoder PF
Hook
Holder high voltage Ferrite core Clamp
Right Side of the Printer  Set the ferrite core at the position in the figure above and route the motor CR Assy cable through the hook and four clamps (1→2→3→4).
 Pull out the following cables from the holder high voltage and pass them through the hook and four clamps (1→2→3→4).
• Secondary side power cable
Right • High voltage Assy cable
• Motor PF Assy cable
 Pull out the roll unit connector cable from the holder high voltage and pass it through the two clamps (6→7).
 Pass the ASF home detection sensor cable through the hole of the holder high voltage and the two clamps (6→7).
 Pull out the following cables from the holder high voltage and pass them through the hole of the holder high voltage and the two clamps (6→7).
• Detector front tray cable
• Stacker sensor cable
• Detector roll unit cable
• High-voltage module cable
Panel FFC
 Check the following connector assignment for connecting the cables to the main board Assy.

㻯㻺㻞㻝㻞 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻟 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻠 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻟

㻯㻺㻝㻜㻞
㻔㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㼚㼑㼠㻕
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻥
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻟
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻟 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻢 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻠

㻯㻺㻟㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻞 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻠 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻣 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻢

㻯㻺㻟㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻟 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻞 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻠 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻢 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻤 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻞

CSIC-FFC
CN No. Name CN No. Name
104 High voltage Assy cable 209 Stacker sensor cable
204 ASF home detection sensor cable 216 Roll unit connector cable (SC-
PX1VL only)
206 Detector front tray cable
Double-sided tape 301 Motor CR Assy cable
208 Detector roll unit cable
Secure the following FFC with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above. 302 Motor PF Assy cable
 Panel FFC 502 Secondary side power cable
 CSIC-FFC

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 241

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Rear Right of the Printer Frame,Top,Right (1)

Frame top right

Decompression pump cable

APG encoder FFC

LED board cable

IS buffer Frame

Encoder

LED board cable

Ink leak sensor board cable

APG motor
cable Decompression pump cable
Hole
IS motor
cable

Frame top right

IS encoder FFC
Ferrite core
Hook
Ink leak sensor board cable CSIC-FFC Double-sided tape

 Route the ink leak sensor board cable through the two hooks to the frame top right.
 The wiring of the APG motor cable is as follows. Hook
1. Secure the cable with acetate tape at the positions shown in the figure above. Groove

2. Pass the cable through the hook and set the ferrite core at the position in the figure above.
3. Route the cable through the two hooks to the frame top right.  Pass the ink leak sensor board cable through the groove of the frame top right from the APG Assy side to connect ink leak sensor board cable to the IS sub
4. Secure the cable to prevent the encoder and cable contacting each other. board Assy.
 The wiring of the IS motor cable is as follows.  The wiring of the decompression pump cable is as follows.
1. Pull out the cable from the hole of the APG Assy. 1. Pass the cable through the groove of the frame top right.
2. Route the cable through the two hooks to the frame top right. 2. Pass the cable through the seven hooks of the frame top right.
 Pass the following FFC through the two hooks and secure them with double-sided tape.  The wiring of the LED board cable is as follows.
• APG encoder FFC 1. Pull out the cable from between the ink supply Assy frame and the IS buffer.
• IS encoder FFC 2. Pass the cable through the groove of the frame top right.
• CSIC-FFC 3. Pass the cable through the seven hooks of the frame top right.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 242

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Frame,Top,Right (2) Frame,Top,Right (3)

Driven release detection sensor cable

APG encoder FFC

IS encoder FFC

CSIC-FFC

IS sub FFC

Frame top right

Panel FFC
Gap
Frame top right

APG Assy

APG motor cable

IS motor cable

Bottom of frame top right (rear) APG motor cable

Hook
Double-sided tape

IS motor cable Driven release detection sensor cable

Hook

 The wiring of the APG motor cable and IS motor cable is as follows.
1. Pass the cables through the gap of the APG Assy and frame top right.
2. Pass the cables through the four hooks at the bottom of the frame top right. 1. Secure the IS sub FFC with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above.
 The wiring of the driven release detection sensor cable is as follows. 2. Secure the CSIC-FFC with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above.
1. Pull out the cable from the bottom to the top of the frame top right. 3. Pass the IS encoder FFC and APG encoder FFC through the hook of the frame top right and secure it with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above.
2. Pass the cable through the six hooks of the frame top right. 4. Pass the panel FFC through the three hooks of the frame top right and secure it with double-sided tape as shown in the figure above.

Disassembly and Assembly Routing FFCs/cables 243

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

5
ADJUSTMENT

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.1 Overview 5.1.2 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for

Adjustments
This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer.
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
 Tools

5.1.1 Precautions Table 5-1. Tools

Tool Name Part Number Target Adjustment
Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer.
Commercially
Thickness Gauge T = 1.10 PG Position Adjustment
 Always refer to "5.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by available
Repaired Part" (p.246) and make sure to perform all the Commercially
Thickness Gauge = 1.40 PG Position Adjustment
adjustments listed in the table in the given order. available
 Always read and follow the precautions given in each section Commercially
Thickness Gauge = 0.60 LD Roller Height Check
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can available
result in malfunction of the printer. Commercially
 In the status where the housing upper Assy is removed, in order Thickness Gauge = 0.80 LD Roller Height Check
available
to operate the printer from the adjustment program or the like, Commercially
connect the printer cover detection sensor to the connector, fix Scale PW adjustment
available
it with tape, etc. and operate the printer with its cover closed.
Sonic Tension Meter U-508 1640645 PF Belt Tension Check
(A printer cover open error is generated when the sensor is
OFF.) Digital Multimeter + Commercially
Mist Recovery Check
At that time, there is a risk of getting caught in moving parts, High-Voltage Probe available*
dropping parts inside the equipment, electric shock or short Commercially
Colorimeter (i1Pro2) High-Accuracy ID Adjustment
circuits at energized parts, so work while ensuring safety and available
make sure to restore the original function after the work.
Note "*": Recommended manufacturer and model number (if resistance value 100 MΩ is not
used, accurate measurement may not be possible and the standard may not be
satisfied. As a result, the in-printer mist recovery function does not work, and the
inside of the printer and the back of the print may be contaminated.)
Digital multimeter: FLUKE True-rms 110Series (ex. FLUKE 115)
High-voltage probe: FLUKE 80K-6
 Software

Table 5-2. Software

Adjustment
Software Name Code Explanation
target
Tape Printer cover detection sensor General Download from the adjustment
Adjustment Program ---
adjustment items program download site.
High-Accuracy
ColorBase2 --- Use the software for the user.
ID Adjustment

Adjustment Overview 245

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part Table 5-3. Mechanism Adjustment
The table from the following page lists the required adjustments depending upon the Adjustment Type Mechanism Adjustment
parts being repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check Priority 1 2 3
which adjustment(s) must be carried out. LD Roller
PG PF Belt
Adjustment Item Position
Adjustment Tension Check
Adjustment
 If the EEPROM data cannot be read out from the old Main
Board using the Adjustment Program when replacing the Remove --- --- O
Belt PF
Main Board is required, the Waste Ink Pad and Lower Paper Replacement --- --- O
Guide Ink Pad Tray must be replaced with the Main Board Remove O --- ---
at the same time. Print Head
Replacement O --- ---
 After all required adjustments are completed, use the “Final
Remove O --- ---
check pattern print” function to print all adjustment CR Assy
patterns for final check. If you find a problem with the Replacement O --- ---
printout patterns, carry out the adjustment again. Remove O --- ---
 When replacing the Main Board and the Printer Mechanism CR Belt
Replacement O --- ---
at the same time, the adjustment should be made after

Part name
performing the initial setting. Remove --- O ---
ASF Assy
Replacement --- O ---
Remove O --- ---
 The table items and marks used in the “Required Adjustment PGF Assy
List” provided on the following pages have the following Replacement O --- ---
meanings. Remove O --- ---
Printer Mechanism
• “O” indicates that the adjustment must be carried Replacement O O O
out. Remove --- --- O
Motor PF Assy
• “---” indicates that the adjustment is not required. Replacement --- --- O
• The “Mechanism Adjustment” should be performed Remove --- --- O
Roller PF Assy
just after reinstalling or reassembling the part or unit. Replacement --- --- O

• The “Adjustments using the Adjustment Program”

need to be performed after reassembling the printer
completely. (see " Table 5-4 Adjustments using the
Adjustment Program (p247)")
 If you have removed or replaced multiple parts, make sure to
check the required adjustments for the all parts. And when
multiple adjustments must be carried out, be sure to carry out
them in the order given in the “Priority” row.

Adjustment Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part 246

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 5-4. Adjustments using the Adjustment Program

Adjustment Type Adjustment using the Adjustment Program
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Initialize PW sensor deterioration offset

(S/No. & MAC address included)

Head angular mecha adjustment

Initialize PF deterioration offset

Motor heat protection control

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
Initialize CD tray offset

Encoder & Scale check

Maintenance counter
EEPROM data copy

Mist recovery check

PWPG adjustment

PF/EJ adjustment

Bi-D adjustment

Shipping setting
PW adjustment

PE adjustment
Head ID input
Initial setting

Sensor check
APG check
Ink charge
Adjustment Item

HOLDER,POROUS Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
PAD,PG,LOWER Assy Replace --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
CD Tray
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Power Supply Unit
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Replace O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O
Main Board
Replace
(EEPROM --- O O O --- --- --- O --- O --- O O O O --- --- --- O O O O
copy disable)
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Decomp Motor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
Ink Supply Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
IS Sub Board Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
PF Encoder Assy
Part name

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Belt PF
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
PF Scale
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- O O
APG Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Print Head
Replace --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- O --- --- --- --- --- O O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Detector PW
Replace --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O O --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Scale CR
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O --- O --- O --- O --- --- O O
CR Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O O --- O --- O --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O O
APG Sensor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
CR Belt
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O

Adjustment Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part 247

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
Table 5-4. Adjustments using the Adjustment Program
Adjustment Type Adjustment using the Adjustment Program
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Initialize PW sensor deterioration offset

(S/No. & MAC address included)

Head angular mecha adjustment

Initialize PF deterioration offset

Motor heat protection control

Final check pattern print

Colorimetric calibration
Initialize CD tray offset

Encoder & Scale check

Maintenance counter
EEPROM data copy

Mist recovery check

PWPG adjustment

PF/EJ adjustment

Bi-D adjustment

Shipping setting
PW adjustment

PE adjustment
Head ID input
Initial setting

Sensor check
APG check
Ink charge
Adjustment Item

Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Motor CR Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
ASF Motor
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
ASF Paper Detector
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
ASF Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O O
Shaft Release Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- O O
PE Detector Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
PGU Assy
Part name

Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
EJ Starwheel Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Roller EJ Front Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O --- --- --- --- O --- O O
PGF Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O --- --- --- --- O --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O O O O O O O O O --- O O
Printer Mechanism
Replace --- --- --- O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O
High Voltage Board
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Motor PF Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Remove --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O
Roller PF Assy
Replace --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O --- --- --- --- --- --- --- O O

Adjustment Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part 248

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.3 Adjustment Items

Table 5-5. Adjustment List
Adjustment
Class Adjustment items Purpose Adjustment method overview Adjustment pattern Inspection sheet Tools/jigs Ref.
program
PG adjustment Implemented to secure the correct distance between the head Set PG to PG1 using the adjustment program. Clearance gauge
nozzle surface and paper guide front, and to stabilize the print After set PG1, place the clearance gauge at the designated --- o --- (p 286)
quality by adjusting the parallelism between the 0-digit side location, move the carriage unit above the clearance gauge and
and the full-digit side. check.
Mechanical
adjustment LD roller height adjustment and check Implemented to optimally adjust the position of the LD roller Adjust the gap between the LD roller and the retard roller to an Clearance gauge
axis with respect to the retard roller, and to stabilize the feed appropriate value. --- --- --- (p 292)
paper.
Belt PF tension adjustment Implemented to reduce the load on the motor PF Assy, and to Adjust the installation position of the motor PF Assy to reach the Sonic tension meter
--- --- --- (p 290)
secure the paper feeding accuracy. appropriate belt tension.
EEPROM data copy Used to copy the required adjustment values from the old board Take a backup of the EEPROM data using the adjustment
Assy to the new board Assy when the main board Assy is program when the old board Assy has been installed. --- o --- --- (p 252)
replaced, and to reduce the incidental adjustment man-hours. Restore the read data after changing to the new board Assy.
Initial setting Used to write the information, etc. specific to the destination Enter the serial number using the adjustment program, and write
when the main board Assy is replaced. the information about the Initial setting to the main board Assy. --- o --- --- (p 253)
Also used to make the MAC address settings, if necessary.
Head ID input Used to register the head rank ID in the printer during head From the adjustment program menu, select and run Head ID input
Initial setting replacement. (auto input).
(The head rank ID is an ID for driving the print head at the After entering the head ID, confirm on the same menu if the head
--- o --- --- (p 255)
optimum voltage, and for optimizing the ink discharge rate.) ID has been correctly written.
Each head has an ID, and the ID information is pasted on the
head on a label.
Initialize PF deterioration offset Used to initialize each deterioration correction counter From the adjustment program menu, select Initialize deterioration --- o --- --- (p 256)
depending on the replaced part. offset, and perform counter initialization.
Initialize PW sensor deterioration offset --- o --- --- (p 256)
Initialize CD tray offset --- o --- --- (p 257)
Motor heat protection control Used to measure the production variation, and to set an From the adjustment program menu, select each Motor heat
appropriate correction value. protection control, specify the replaced part and then run
Also, used to make a pass/fail judgment for whether the correction to automatically calculate the correction value and --- o --- --- (p 258)
operation load is within the expected range by estimating perform operation load check.
from the motor current value.
Head angular mecha adjustment Used to mechanically correct the print deviation due to parts From the adjustment program menu, select and run Head angular Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
production variation and the inclination occurring at the time mecha adjustment and then print the adjustment pattern.
of installation of the print head. Based on the judgment criteria, determine the adjustment value
from the adjustment pattern, and then operate the adjustment
mechanism provided in the carriage unit to make adjustments.  Vertical direction:
PGPP(A4)
OK o --- (p 259)
 Horizontal direction:
Super Fine Paper (A4)

Adjustment OK NG
NG
PWPG adjustment Used to correct the detection position of the detector PW for From the adjustment program menu, select and run PWPG Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
each PG with the help of software, and thus prevent any adjustment and then print on Photo Matte Paper. --- o for pigment (A4) --- (p 265)
variation in the detection position as a result of change in PG.
PW adjustment Used to correct deviations caused by characteristics of the From the adjustment program menu, select and run PW Photo Matte Paper/exclusive Scale
detector PW and installation variation, with the help of adjustment and then print the adjustment pattern. for pigment (A4)
software. Based on the judgment criteria, determine the adjustment value -2 -1 0 1 2
Also used to correct the print timing with the help of software from the adjustment pattern, and then from the PW adjustment
so that the embossing start position in the main scanning menu, enter the adjustment value. -2 -2
direction reaches the target value. -1 -1
o (p 266)
0 0
1 1
2 2
-2 -1 0 1 2

Adjustment Adjustment Items 249

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C
Table 5-5. Adjustment List
Adjustment
Class Adjustment items Purpose Adjustment method overview Adjustment pattern Inspection sheet Tools/jigs Ref.
program
PF/EJ adjustment Used to make software-based corrections in order to eliminate From the adjustment program menu, select and run PF/EJ Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
paper feeding errors that occur as a result of mechanical adjustment and then print the adjustment pattern. for pigment (A4)
variations or media conveyance characteristics. Based on the judgment criteria, determine the adjustment value
from the adjustment pattern, and then from the PF/EJ adjustment OK
menu, enter the adjustment value.

o --- (p 268)
NG NG OK NG

Adjustment NG
Bi-D adjustment Used to correct the print timing with the help of software in From the adjustment program menu, select and run Bi-D Super Fine Paper (A4)
order to match the print position during outgoing stroke and adjustment and then print the adjustment pattern.
returning stroke when bidirectional printing is performed. Based on the judgment criteria, determine the adjustment value
from the adjustment pattern, and then from the Bi-D adjustment o --- (p 270)
menu, enter the adjustment value.
OK NG NG
PE adjustment Used to correct deviations in the paper detection position From the adjustment program menu, select and run PE adjustment Super Fine Paper (A4)
caused by variation in the PE detector installation position and and then print on Super Fine Paper.
--- o --- (p 273)
head position, with the help of software. Correct the deviation in the paper detection position with the help
of software.
Head cleaning Implemented to recover printing failures such as missing dots Perform cleaning by using the adjustment program, and check the Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
that occur when a pattern is printed in the adjustment discharge condition by the nozzle check pattern. --- o for pigment (A4) --- (p 274)
program.
Ink charge Used to replenish ink in the print head and ink supply path, From the adjustment program, select and run Ink charge. Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
--- o --- (p 275)
and to set the printer to a usable state. for pigment (A4)
Waste ink pad counter Used to initialize the waste ink porous pad counter after Initialize the counter by the adjustment program after replacing Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
replacing the waste ink porous pad for the products in which a the border-less waste ink porous pad. --- o for pigment (A4) --- (p 278)
maintenance error has occurred.
Mist recovery check Used to check whether the voltage supplied to the mist From the adjustment program menu, select Mist recovery check, Photo Matte Paper/exclusive
recovery mechanism from the high-voltage module is and then output voltage from the high-voltage module. for pigment (A4)  Digital multimeter
--- o (p 279)
appropriate. With the help of a digital multimeter with probe, measure the  Probe
voltage between the paper guide lower electrode plate and frame.
APG check Used to perform PG switching operation, and check whether From the adjustment program menu, select and run APG check.
Maintenance --- o --- --- (p 281)
the PG switching function is operating normally.
functions
Sensor check Used to read the present condition of each sensor, and check From the adjustment program menu, select and run Sensor check.
--- o --- --- (p 282)
whether the sensor is operating normally.
Encoder & Scale check Used to ensure that there are no abnormalities such as From the adjustment program menu, select and run Encoder &
scratches and dirt on the scale, and that reading can be Scale check. --- o --- --- (p 283)
performed normally with the encoder.
Shipping setting Used to reset the error history after the completion of repair From the adjustment program menu, select and run Shipping
work, and if necessary, to select cleaning when the power is setting. o --- --- (p 284)
turned ON at the next time.
CR lock release Used to unlock the CR lock from the adjustment program, and From the adjustment program menu, select and run CR lock
to ensure that the CR lock is not enabled even when the release. o --- --- (p 285)
printer is turned OFF.
Print final check pattern Implemented to check whether all adjustment results are From the adjustment program, select and run the target function.
o --- ---
implemented normally.
High-accuracy ID adjustment Used to create the correction value of the ink discharge rate so Print the colorimetry pattern from the color correction application Photo Matte Paper/exclusive Colorimeter
as to become equivalent to the print color of the printer set as software (ColorBase2), and perform colorimetry with a for pigment (A4)
Color
the SEC standard. colorimeter. --- * (p 295)
correction
Automatically calculate the correction value from the results of
colorimetry, and save them to the printer.

*: Use the color correction application software (ColorBase2).

Adjustment Adjustment Items 250

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.4 Adjustment Program

This section describes the operating environment of the adjustment program, the
functions concerning safety and personal information protection, and the adjustments
that need to be explained in particular. For details on the functions of the adjustment
program that are not explained here, refer to Adjustment Items and the Order by
Repaired Part (p246).

5.4.1 Operating Environment

The operating environment of the adjustment program is as described below.
 Operating environment
 OS: Windows 10
 Interface: USB

Adjustment Adjustment Program 251

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.4.2 Details of adjustment program functions

EEPROM DATA COPY

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program.

2. From the adjustment program menu, select EEPROM Data Copy.
3. Make sure a check mark has been entered for items for which data copying is
necessary, and then press the [Backup] button.
4. Turn OFF the printer power supply, and replace the main board Assy with a new
one.
5. Connect the printer and PC, and then turn ON the printer.
6. In the EEPROM Data Copy menu, press the [Load] button to copy the data.

Figure 5-1. [EEPROM Data Copy] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 252

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

INITIAL SETTING  Enter the last 6 digits of the MAC address (xx:yy:zz part) in the
adjustment program.
 Execute this function only when the EEPROM backup has Example of MAC address: 44:D2:44:xx:yy:zz
failed (backup cannot be taken). (xx, yy, zz is a value specific to each printer)
 If a MAC address conflict occurs on the network, you may face
troubles such as not being able to use the network. Therefore, MAC address
make the settings according to the setting flow.
 If the MAC address is changed, the following events occur.
Therefore, notify the user when returning.
• If the user has set a MAC address filter in the router, it
may not be possible to connect to the printer after
resetting.
• The default printer name on the network is EPSON +
last 6 digits of the MAC address. Therefore, the
printer name shall be different from before
replacement.

Adjustment Adjustment Program 253

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Adjustment procedure

1. After replacing the main board Assy of the printer, connect the printer and PC, and
then turn ON the printer.
2. Start the adjustment program, and select Initial setting.
3. In the Initial setting menu, make sure a check mark has been entered for the items
below.
 EEPROM data initial setting
 Product serial no. (10 digits)
 MAC address
4. In the product serial no. (10 digits), enter the serial no. of the product.
5. In MAC address, enter the MAC address of the product.
6. Press the [Run] button to make the Initial setting of the main board Assy.

Figure 5-2. [Initial setting] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 254

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

HEAD ID INPUT  When you press the [Confirm] button, you can check the
currently-entered head ID. By comparing the numeric values
 Adjustment procedure before and after input, you can check if the correct head ID has
1. Start the adjustment program, and select Head ID input. been written.
 If Head ID input cannot be performed, a head failure could
2. Press the [Enter] button and perform Head ID input. have occurred. Replace the print head with a new one.
 The head ID label is pasted on the side of the print head. Note
down the head ID before installing the print head.

Print head

Head ID label

Figure 5-3. [Head ID input] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 255

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

INITIALIZE PF DETERIORATION OFFSET INITIALIZE PW SENSOR DETERIORATION OFFSET

 Adjustment procedure  Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Initialize PF deterioration offset. 1. Start the adjustment program, and select Initialize PW sensor deterioration
offset.
2. Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the corresponding counter.
2. Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the corresponding counter.

Figure 5-4. [Initialize PF deterioration offset] screen

Figure 5-5. [Initialize PW sensor deterioration offset] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 256

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

INITIALIZE CD TRAY OFFSET

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Initialize CD tray deterioration offset.
2. Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the corresponding counter.

Figure 5-6. [Initialize CD tray offset] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 257

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

MOTOR HEAT PROTECTION CONTROL

 Parts to be adjusted

Perform Motor heat protection control if you have replaced the following parts.
 Motor CR Assy
 Motor PF Assy
 APG/MNU motor (IS motor)
 Mechanical unit
 Power supply board
 Main board Assy
 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select the part to be replaced.

2. Enter a check mark for the replaced part, and then press the [Run] button to
execute Motor heat protection control.

Figure 5-7. [Motor heat protection control] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 258

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

HEAD ANGULAR MECHA ADJUSTMENT  Horizontal direction

 Paper/Paper feed tray

 Vertical direction
• Paper size: A4
• Paper type: Photo Paper
• Paper feed tray: ASF
 Horizontal direction
• Paper size: A4
• Paper type: Super Fine Paper
• Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment pattern
 Vertical direction

Figure 5-9. Horizontal direction adjustment pattern

Figure 5-8. Vertical direction adjustment pattern

Adjustment Adjustment Program 259

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Judgment method  Horizontal direction

 Vertical direction Examine the printout patterns (-5 to 5), select the value for the group of which
the gaps between the 2 color bars are the smallest, and adjust by rotating the
Search for the most straight pattern from the adjustment patterns -12 to 12,
angular adjustment cam of the CR Assy
and enter the numeric value of that pattern. Check in each of the 0 to 80-digit
direction and the 80 to 0-digit direction.

OK NG

Bigger gap
=>No good Bigger gap
Small gap =>No good
=>Good

Figure 5-11. Horizontal direction judgment method

Figure 5-10. Vertical direction judgment method

Adjustment Adjustment Program 260

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Vertical direction adjustment procedure 4. Select "Vertical direction".

Here, we will describe the procedure from after the housing upper Assy (P. 119) has 5. Set the designated paper in ASF.
been removed.
6. Press [Print] to print the adjustment pattern.
1. Connect the panel FFC to the panel Assy.
7. Check the adjustment pattern, and determine the adjustment value based on the
2. Turn ON the printer. judgment method.
3. Start the adjustment program, and select Head angular mecha adjustment. 8. Turn OFF the printer and unlock the CR lock.
9. Move the CR Assy to the Full-digit side, and remove the guide FFC head.
(see P. 153)
10. Operate the head angular adjustment lever with reference to the procedure below
to perform adjustment.

 Use tweezers to move the head angular adjustment lever.

 The pattern with "0" written below the adjustment pattern is
the current adjustment value. If the best pattern is in the minus
(-) direction, move the inclination adjustment lever in the
clockwise direction by as many notches as the number of the
best pattern. If the best pattern is in the plus (+) direction,
move the inclination adjustment lever in the counterclockwise
direction by as many notches as the number of the best pattern.
Example) If the best adjustment pattern is "-3", move the
inclination adjustment lever by three notches in the clockwise
direction.

Figure 5-12. [Head angular mecha adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 261

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Horizontal direction adjustment procedure

Here, we will describe the procedure from after the housing upper Assy (P. 119) has
been removed.
1. Connect the panel FFC to the panel Assy.
Head tilt adjustment lever
2. Turn ON the printer.
3. Start the adjustment program, and select Head angular mecha adjustment.

-9 9

Front side of CR Assy Front side of CR Assy

moves down. moves up.

Figure 5-14. [Head angular mecha adjustment] screen

Figure 5-13.
11. To check the adjustment results, perform step 2 to step 7 again.
12. After the completion of adjustment, assemble each removed part.

Adjustment Adjustment Program 262

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4. Select "Vertical direction".

5. Set the designated paper in ASF.
6. Press [Print] to print the adjustment pattern.
7. Check the adjustment pattern, and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment method.
8. Turn OFF the printer and unlock the CR lock.
9. Move the CR Assy to the Full-digit side, and remove the cover CR and support
guide tube. (see P. 153)
10. Loosen the three screws of the print head by half a turn.

Screw
Figure 5-15. Position of print head securing screws

Adjustment Adjustment Program 263

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

11. Loosen the fixing screw of the Head angular adjustment cam of CR Assy by
approximately 30 degrees, and then move the cam according to the following
adjustment standard.

The pattern with "0" written below the adjustment pattern is the
current adjustment value. If the best pattern is in the minus (-)
direction, move the inclination adjustment cam in the
counterclockwise direction by as many notches as the number of
the best pattern. If the best pattern is in the plus (+) direction, move
the inclination adjustment cam in the clockwise direction by as
many notches as the number of the best pattern.
Example) If the best adjustment pattern is "-3", move the
inclination adjustment cam by three notches in the
counterclockwise direction.

Screw

Head inclination
adjustment cam

Figure 5-16.
12. To check the adjustment results, perform step 2 to step 7 again.
13. After the completion of adjustment, assemble each removed part.

Adjustment Adjustment Program 264

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

PWPG ADJUSTMENT

 Paper/Paper feed tray

 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Photo Matte Paper
 Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select the target adjustment item.
2. Set the designated paper in ASF.
3. Press the [Run] button to implement PWPG adjustment.

Figure 5-17. [PWPG adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 265

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

PW ADJUSTMENT Example) In the case of the figure on the right, enter "0" in upper
end and "-2" in right end.
 Paper/Paper feed tray
 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Photo Matte Paper (exclusive for pigment)
 Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment pattern -3
5 mm 5 mm
-2
-1 0 1 -1

-10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-13 -13
-12 -12
-11 -11
-10 -10
-9 -9
-8 -8
-7 -7
-6 -6
-5 -5
-4 -4
-3 -3
-2 -2
-1 -1
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Figure 5-18. Adjustment pattern 13 13

 Judgment method -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

From the step-wise patterns printed on the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the
paper, select the numeric values positioned at 5 mm from the ends of the paper. Figure 5-19. Adjustment pattern

Adjustment Adjustment Program 266

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select PW adjustment.

2. Set the designated paper in ASF.
3. Press [Print] to print the adjustment pattern.
4. Check the adjustment pattern, and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment method.
5. Enter the adjustment value.
6. Make sure the adjustment value has been entered, press the [Enter] button, and
then save the adjustment value to the printer.

Figure 5-20. [PW adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 267

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

PF/EJ ADJUSTMENT  Judgment method

Select the numeric value of the pattern in which there is no overlapping of the
 Paper/Paper feed tray upper and lower block, and there are least number of white streaks.
 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Photo Matte Paper (exclusive for pigment)
 Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment pattern

PF adjustment pattern

EJ adjustment pattern

Figure 5-21. Adjustment pattern

Adjustment Adjustment Program 268

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select PF/EJ adjustment.

2. Set the designated paper in ASF.
3. Press [Print] to print the adjustment pattern.
4. Check the adjustment pattern, and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment method.
5. Enter the adjustment value.
6. Make sure the adjustment value has been entered, press the [Enter] button, and
then save the adjustment value to the printer.

If there is no pattern among the adjustment patterns that satisfies

the judgment method, a pattern satisfying the judgment method is
present outside the pattern printing range. Therefore, select the
best pattern and enter the adjustment value, and thereafter, print
the adjustment pattern again, and determine the adjustment value.

Figure 5-22. [PF/EJ adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 269

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

BI-D ADJUSTMENT  PG1

 Paper/Paper feed tray

 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Super Fine Paper (3 sheets)
 Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment pattern
 PG0

Figure 5-24. Adjustment pattern (PG1)

Figure 5-23. Adjustment pattern (PG0)

Adjustment Adjustment Program 270

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 PG2  Judgment method

Select a pattern where there is no gap or overlapping between the left and right
patterns.

Figure 5-25. Adjustment pattern (PG2)

Adjustment Adjustment Program 271

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Bi-D adjustment.

2. Set the designated paper in ASF.
3. Make the setting with the PG setting radio button, and then press [Print] to print
the adjustment pattern.

Because a sheet of paper is required for each PG, three sheets of

paper are needed to print all of PG0/1/2.

4. Check the adjustment pattern, and determine the adjustment value based on the
judgment method.
5. Enter the adjustment value.
6. Make sure the adjustment value has been entered, press the [Enter] button, and
then save the adjustment value to the printer.
Note : If there is no pattern among the adjustment patterns that satisfies the judgment method,
a pattern satisfying the judgment method is present outside the pattern printing range.
Therefore, select the best pattern and enter the adjustment value, and thereafter, print
the adjustment pattern again, and determine the adjustment value.

Figure 5-26. [Bi-D adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 272

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

PE ADJUSTMENT

 Paper/Paper feed tray

 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Super Fine Paper
 Paper feed tray: ASF
 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select PE adjustment.

2. Set the designated paper in ASF.
3. Press [Run], and perform PE adjustment. The adjustment results are
automatically saved to the printer.

Figure 5-27. [PE adjustment] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 273

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

HEAD CLEANING

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Head cleaning.

2. From the adjustment program menu, select the Head cleaning strength. You can
select from the following cleaning:
 CL1 (weak)
 CL2 (medium)
 CL3 (strong cleaning)
3. Press the [Cleaning] button to perform cleaning with the selected strength.
4. You can check the results of cleaning from "Print nozzle check".
 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Plain Paper
5. Set the designated paper in ASF.
6. Press the [Print] button in the nozzle check print sheet to print the nozzle check
pattern. Figure 5-28. [Head cleaning] screen

7. From the check pattern, make sure there are no missing dots.
8. If there are missing dots, perform cleaning, and then again print and check the
check pattern.

Adjustment Adjustment Program 274

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

INK CHARGE

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Ink charge.

2. From the adjustment program menu, select the type of ink charge. You can select
from the following items:
 Head ink charge
 Initial ink charge
3. When you press the [Ink charge] button, the amount of ink corresponding to the
selected type is replenished.

 Do not select the "Initial ink charge" when there is ink

remaining in the ink supply path of the ink supply Assy. The
ink inside the ink supply path is not counted as waste ink.
Therefore, ink may leak from the maintenance box.
 Perform "Initial ink charge" only when charging ink after
replaced the ink supply Assy.
When performing Ink charge after replacing the parts other
than the Ink supply Assy, select “Head ink charge”.
 When you select the "Initial ink charge", you will require two
sets of the ASP ink cartridge. (SC-P700 only)
If a message indicating insufficient residual ink amount occurs,
replace the ink cartridge, and continue with the operation.
Figure 5-29. [Ink charge] screen

 For details on Ink charge and nozzle check pattern printing,

refer to P. 274
 For operation flow and example of operation screen of Ink
charge (Ink charge type: Initial ink charge), refer to P. 276.

Adjustment Adjustment Program 275

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Operation flow and example of operation screen of Ink charge (Ink charge type: Initial ink charge)

Start No. Adjustment program/panel display Operation Remark

By following the  Use a new

guidance window of maintenance box
the adjustment for the Initial ink
program, replace the charge.
1. Replace maintenance box 1
maintenance box with  Do not select the
Printer power OFF→ON a new one, then turn "Initial ink charge"
the printer on. when there is ink
remaining in the ink
supply path of the
ink supply Assy.

After rebooting the

printer, screen for
Reboot printer setting language/date
Display language/date and time and time will be
setting screen displayed. Input it as
necessary and go on to
the next screen.

2 ---

2. Date and time setting

operation

Set the ink cartridge, When performing

close the cover printer Initial ink charge
3. Set ink cartridge
Assy, and start Initial without closing the
Perform Initial ink charge
ink charge. cover printer Assy,
3 connect the sensor
detector cover printer
Initial ink charge and secure it with a
piece of tape or the like
while operating.

A p.277

Adjustment Adjustment Program 276

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

A p.276
No. Adjustment program/panel display Operation Remark

Maintenance error For SC-P900, at least

Maintenance No occurs when ink in the two sets of ASP ink
ink cartridge gets cartridges are required.
error occur? insufficient. By replace
the ink cartridge and
Yes closing the cover
4 printer Assy, Initial ink
charge restarts.
4. Replace ink cartridge

Restart Initial ink charge

Initial ink charge is

completed.

5. Finish 5 ---

Adjustment Adjustment Program 277

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

WASTE INK PAD COUNTER

 Adjustment procedure

1. Replace the paper guide front and lower porous pad (border-less porous pad) with
a new one.
2. Connect the printer and PC, and then turn ON the printer.
3. Start the adjustment program, and select Waste ink pad counter.
4. When you enter a check mark in the "Border-less pad counter" check box, and
press the [Initialize] button, the counter is cleared.

Figure 5-30. [Waste ink pad counter] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 278

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

MIST RECOVERY CHECK

 Tools required
 Adjustment program
 Digital multimeter + High-voltage probe
 Adjustment procedure

 Standard value of Mist recovery check: 380 ± 30 V

 If the internal resistance value of the digital multimeter falls
below approximately 100 MΩ, it may not be possible to
perform the measurement accurately. Therefore, use a high-
voltage probe to perform measurement.

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Mist recovery check.

Figure 5-31. [Mist recovery check] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 279

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2. Press the [Run] button to turn ON high-voltage output from the high voltage Assy. 4. Make sure the voltage is in the range of 380 V ± 30 V.
3. Install the high-voltage probe on the digital multimeter, and measure the voltage 5. Press the [OK] button on the information window that is displayed, and then turn
between the full digit-side frame and the terminal of the secondary side cable of OFF the high-voltage module.
high voltage Assy.

Full digit-side frame

Terminal of the secondary side cable of high voltage Assy

Figure 5-32. High-voltage probe attaching point

Adjustment Adjustment Program 280

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

APG CHECK

 [PG Change Operation Check] Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select APG check.

2. Select PG Change Operation Check and Press the [Perform] button, and make sure
the APG switching operation ends normally.

The position of the PG can be known by seeing the PG value

punched on the PG switching cam on the left side of the CR Assy
When you perform the APG check, the PG switches automatically
in the order of PG0 => PG1 => PG2 => PG3 => PG4 => PG5, and
returns to the PG0 state.

 [PG Condition Check on “PG1”] Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select APG check.

2. Select PG Condition Check on “PG1” and Press the [Perform] button to Set PG to
“PG1”.
3. Confirm that it has switched to PG1, disconnect the power cable of the printer, and
then perform PG measurement or adjustment.

Figure 5-33. [APG check] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 281

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

SENSOR CHECK

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Sensor check.

2. From the adjustment program menu, select the sensor category you want to check.
You can select from the following sensor categories:
 Ink end sensor board
 Ink leak sensor board
 Mechanical sensor
3. Press the [Run] button, and check the sensor status from the display on the sensor
check results window.

This function lists the status of each sensor during the moment the
[Run] button is pressed.
If you want to change the sensor status and check again, press the
[Retry] button displayed on the sensor check results window to be
able to read the updated sensor status.

Figure 5-34. [Sensor check] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 282

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

ENCODER & SCALE CHECK

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Scale check.

2. Select the combination of the encoder and scale you wish to inspect with the help
of the adjustment program radio buttons. You can select from the following parts:
 CR encoder & scale
 APG/RLS encoder & scale
 ASF/MNU encoder & scale
3. Press the [Run] button to perform inspection.
4. Check the inspection results, and if a fault is determined from the inspection
results, check the corresponding part and perform the operation again.

Figure 5-35. [Scale check] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 283

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

SHIPPING SETTING

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select Shipping setting.

2. If you select "Cleaning flag set" from the adjustment program menu, cleaning will
be performed the next time you turn the printer ON.
If there is a need to perform cleaning, enter a check mark in the check box.
Even if you do not enter a check mark in the check box, the error history is erased.
3. Press the [Write] button to write the Shipping setting to the printer.
4. Turn OFF the printer.

Figure 5-36. [Shipping setting] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 284

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

CR LOCK RELEASE

 Adjustment procedure

1. Start the adjustment program, and select CR lock release.

2. If you press the [Run] button, the CR lock is unlocked.
The CR lock remains unlocked even when the printer is turned OFF. The CR lock
is enabled when the printer is turned ON.

Figure 5-37. [CR lock release] screen

Adjustment Adjustment Program 285

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.5 Mechanism Adjustment and Check 5.5.1.1 Preparation

1. Set PG to PG1 using the adjustment program(P. 281).
This section describes how to adjust and check the mechanism.
2. Disconnect the power cable of the printer and press the Power button on Operating
Panel to discharge the residual charge in the printer.
5.5.1 PG adjustment
3. Place the printer on a level platform, and remove the following parts.
The procedure of performing PG check is described below.
 Paper support Assy (P. 106)
 The standard value of PG is as described below.  Cover rear Assy (P. 107)
PG position "1": 1.20 -0.1 mm/+0.20 mm
 PG adjustment is performed in the PG1 state by the  Cover rear left (P. 108)
adjustment program.  Holder damper left Assy (P. 111)

 Jigs used  Holder damper right Assy (P. 111)

 Thickness gauge: 1.10 mm, 1.40 mm  Cover printer Assy (P. 112)
 Housing side right (P. 113)
 When moving the CR unit, be sure to hold the timing belt.
 Perform operation on the printer by placing it on a level table  Housing side left (P. 115)
without any deformations. If you perform PG adjustment on a  Panel Assy (P. 117)
table having deformations, adjustments will not be made
normally.  Housing upper Assy (P. 119)
 Always perform PG adjustment when the Ink supply Assy and 4. Unlock the CR lock (P. 90), and move the CR Assy to the Full-digit side.
CR guide frame have been fixed.
 Take care that the nozzle surface of the print head is not
scratched by the thickness gauge.

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 286

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5. Make sure that PG is PG1. 6. Place the thickness gauge at the following locations on the platen.
 SC-P700
As for the PG position, see the marking on "Cam APG left" on the
left side of the CR Assy, and make sure "I" is directly above. • Home side: On the 4th and 8th ribs from the Home side
• Full-digit side: On the 4th and 8th ribs from the Full side

Cam APG left

Thickness gauge set position

Figure 5-38. Thickness gauge set position (SC-P700)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 287

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 SC-P900
• Home side: On the 8th and 12th ribs from the Home side
• Full-digit side: On the 8th and 12th ribs from the Full side

Thickness gauge set position

Figure 5-39. Thickness gauge set position (SC-P900)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 288

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.5.1.2 PG adjustment procedure

Adjustment and checking using the thickness gauge
 T = 1.10: Passes through
(The print head does not come in contact with the
thickness gauge.)
 T = 1.40: Stops
(The print head comes in contact with the thickness
gauge.)

1. Slowly move the CR Assy on top of the thickness gauge placed in step 6 in 5.5.1.2
above.
2. The adjustment and checking ends when both the Home side and the Full-digit
side are within the standard value range. If outside the standard value range, make
adjustments according to the procedure below so that the values are within the
standard value range.
3. Loosen the screws (one each) securing the PG adjustment levers on the left and
right of the CR Assy
4. Perform adjustment as described below. Levers Screw
 When T = 1.10 is in contact with the head (PG is narrow): Figure 5-40. PG height adjustment
Raise the left and right levers by the same amount so as to raise the position of
the CR Assy
 When T = 1.40 is not in contact with the head (PG is wide):
Lower the left and right levers by the same amount so as to lower the position
of the CR Assy
5. Once the adjustment is complete, tighten the two screws and perform
measurement again, and keep adjusting until the values are within the standard
value range.

Since the adjustment levers are made of resin, be sure not to over-
tighten the screws.

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 289

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.5.2 Belt PF tension adjustment and check 5.5.2.1 Belt PF tension adjustment procedure
The procedure of adjusting the belt PF tension is described below. 1. Enter the following belt information in the sonic tension meter.

 Tools used  Weight: 1.2 g/m

 Sonic belt tension meter  Width: 3.0 mm

 An object to strike the belt (such as tweezers, etc.)  Span: 114 mm

2. Bring the measurement mike of the sonic tension meter close to the center of the
 With the distance between the measurement mike of the sonic
belt PF.
tension meter and the timing belt is within 5 mm, perform
measurement by bringing the measurement mike close to the 3. Press the [MEASURE] button on the sonic tension meter, and perform
belt such that it does not come in contact with the belt. measurement while striking the belt PF with tweezers or something similar.
 Strike the belt with a weak force enough to enable
measurement with the sonic tension meter.
 When striking the belt with tweezers, take care that the belt
does not get scratched.
 When striking the timing belt, make sure the measurement
mike and the belt do not come in contact with each other.

Standard value of belt PF tension: 8.0 to 14.0 N

Within 5 mm

Measurement mike Belt PF

Figure 5-41. Belt PF tension adjustment (1)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 290

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

4. If the measured value is within the standard value range, there is no need to
perform adjustment. If outside the standard value range, make adjustments
according to the procedure below so that the values are within the standard value
range.
5. Loosen the two screws securing the motor PF Assy, slide the motor PF Assy, and
adjust the tension of the belt PF.
6. Once the adjustment is complete, tighten the two screws and perform
measurement again, and keep adjusting until the values are within the standard
value range.

Screw
Figure 5-42. Belt PF tension adjustment (2)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 291

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.5.3 LD roller height adjustment and check 5.5.3.1 Preparation

The procedure of adjusting the LD roller height is described below. Remove the hopper Assy according to the procedure below. Here, we will describe the
When installing the LD roller guides during disassembly/assembly of the ASF Assy, procedure from after the housing upper Assy (P. 119) has been removed.
adjust the assembly position of the LD roller guides to optimize the position of the
1. Remove two screws.
roller axis with respect to the paper guide so as to prevent a decline in the paper feeding
accuracy as a result of an assembly tolerance.
Rear
If the ASF Assy is not to be replaced but is only to be removed,
marking the installation position of each of the left and right LD
roller guides during disassembly, and installing the LD roller
guides according to the marking during assembly eliminates the
necessity of performing ASF guide roller LD position adjustment.

 Jigs used
 Thickness gauge: 0.6 mm, 0.8 mm

Screw
Figure 5-43. LD roller height adjustment and check (1)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 292

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

2. With the detector AP detection lever pulled out from the hole of the hopper Assy, 5.5.3.2 LD roller height adjustment procedure
slightly open the ASF frame and remove the hopper Assy from the ASF frame.
Adjustment and checking using the thickness gauge
 T = 0.6: Passes through
 T = 0.8: Stops

1. Turn the LD roller to stop it at a position where the arc portion is directly above
the retard roller.
2. Insert the thickness gauge between the Holder,Shaft,LD (yellow part) and paper
Hole guide, and if the value is within the standard value range, there is no need to
perform adjustment. If outside the standard value range, make adjustments
according to the procedure below so that the values are within the standard value
range.

LD roller

Detector AP detection lever

Hopper Assy

Frame
Figure 5-44. LD roller height adjustment and check (2)

Thickness gauge
Paper guide
Figure 5-45. LD roller height adjustment and check (3)

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 293

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

3. Loosen the screws (C.B.S-TITE SCREW, 3X6 2 screws) securing the holder shaft
LD by 1/4 turn, and set the height of the holder shaft LD at the 0-digit side and Upper Upper
full-digit side within the upper-limit/lower-limit range. limit limit
Lower Lower
4. Perform adjustment as described below. limit limit
 When T = 0.6 does not pass through (The gap is narrow):
Raise the position of the holder shaft LD by the same amount.
Screw Screw
 When T = 0.8 passes through (The gap is wide):
Lower the position of the holder shaft LD by the same amount.
5. Once the adjustment is complete, tighten the two screws and perform
measurement again, and keep adjusting until the values are within the standard
value range.

Rear

Holder shaft LD
Figure 5-46.

Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment and Check 294

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.6 Colorimetric Calibration Table 5-6. Tools for Colorimetric Calibration

Tools Purpose / Specification
The description in this section is common to other models. Thus, White reference tile Accessory of calibrator
the basic procedure is basically the same, but some of actual steps Scanning ruler Accessory of calibrator
or patterns may be different.
Backing board Accessory of calibrator
For using as a background of the color chart
Premium Glossy Photo Paper during scanning (only when a backing board is
5.6.1 Overview of the Colorimetric Calibration not attached to calibrator).
 Purpose For connecting printer and calibrator to PC
Two USB cables
It can make revision values which adjust printing color of user's printer and SEC with two USB cables.
standard unit equally.
Note "*1": It is downloaded automatically if connected to the network when a PC starts EPSON
The following parts have an influence on ink discharge, therefore revision is
ColorBase2.
necessary after part exchange.
"*2": The Service Mode cannot select i1iO, i1iSis, ColorMunki, i1Pro, I1iO2 which you
• Print Head can use by the User Mode.
• Main Board
• Power Supply Board table 5-7
This revision values are applied to the EPSON genuine printer driver.
 Tools

Table 5-6. Tools for Colorimetric Calibration

Calibrator
Tools Purpose / Specification White reference tile
Plain paper (A4/Letter) For checking the nozzles. Backing board

Ultra Premium Presentation

Paper Matte
For printing the calibration chart.
Enhanced Matte Paper, Archival
Matte Paper (A4/Letter)
Colorimetric Calibration Scanning ruler
EPSON ColorBase2 (application for user) i1Pro2 calibrator / accessories
application
OS: refer to table 5-7.
The following files must be installed on the PC: Figure 5-47. Calibrator and accessories
PC
- Printer driver for the model to be adjusted
- Adobe AIR Runtime*1
Calibrator*2 X-Rite i1Pro2

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 295

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 5-7. Support OS of EPSON ColorBase2  Calibration principle

(reference) User Measuring a color chart print result (ink discharge amount) in a calibrator.Created
OS bit Service Mode
Mode Color ID information based on the obtained color difference values (L*, a*, b*) is
32 bit ○ ○ stored on the printer.When printing, the printer driver takes the Color ID to correct
Windows 7 SP1 or higher the number of ink droplets (dot generation rate) for each of different sized droplets
64 bit ○ ○
of each colors.
32 bit ○ ○
Windows 8  Correlation with Head ID adjustment
64 bit ○ ○
Head ID: In the print head manufacturing process, ink discharge amount of each
32 bit ○ ○
Windows 8.1 head is actually measured to get individual characteristic information. The
64 bit ○ ○ information is the Head ID that was set to revise a characteristic difference
32 bit ○ ○ between the heads. The Head ID is shown with a label on the each print head,
Windows 10
64 bit ○ ○ therefore you must input the Head ID to the printer after print head exchange.
Mac OS X (10.9.x, 10.10.x, 10.11.x, ○ ---
 Before performing Colorimetric Calibration, the conventional
10.12.x, 10.13.x, 10.14.x,10.15.x)
Head ID must be pre-registered.
 If you do not perform Colorimetric Calibration after
performing Head ID adjustment, the printer will be controlled
only by the Head ID. In that case, the color precision is not
guaranteed.

 Flow of the Colorimetric Calibration

The following steps show the Colorimetric Calibration:
1. Print a nozzle check pattern. If there is nozzle missing, run a head cleaning.
2. Print a color chart with the printer which you want to calibrate via
ColorBase2.
3. Scan the printed color chart with a calibrator.
4. ColorBase2 calculates a Color ID from the scanning result and calculation
parameter of the colorimetric calibration.
5. Write the Color ID to the printer. When printing, printer driver refers to the
data of the User Color ID area.

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 296

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Correlation with User adjustment and Service adjustment

The following table shows a correlation with user's calibration.

Table 5-8. Correlation with User adjustment and Service adjustment

User adjustment Service adjustment
 When the installation
location changes.  After the following parts
 When the printer has exchange:
not been used for an  Print Head
extended period of
Calibration timing  Main Board
time.
 Power Board
 When you are
concerned about  When reduce unit-to-unit
changes in the color variations in color.
tones.
ColorBase2 operation User Mode Service Mode
mode
Only recording to the Same data is recorded to the
“User Color ID area”. following two areas:
Recording area of Color
 “User Color ID area”
ID
 “Production Color ID
area”
“Initializing* the Color “User Color ID area” is overwritten by the data recorded in the
ID” operation contents "Production Color ID area".

Note "*": Menu title in the ColorBase2: “Maintenance” > “Restore Default Calibration” (refer
to 5.6.3 Maintenance menu (Page 309))

After changing Print Head / Main Board / Power Board, the Color
ID data which recorded in the “Production Color ID area” must be
changed from Service Mode of the ColorBase2. When a user carries
out “Initializing the Color ID” as the Production Color ID is not
changed, a mismatch occurs between the Color ID and
characteristic of changed part, then an appropriate color
calibration is not performed.

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 297

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.6.2 Adjusting Method of the Colorimetric Calibration To enhance the color accuracy, the ink churning is recommended
 Adjustment workflow before starting the Colorimetric Calibration. Remove the ink
cartridges, and shake them four or five times, then reinstall them to
The adjustment flow in the service mode is described below. the printer.

START

Connect the printer and

calibrator to the PC,
and start the ColorBase2

Switch to Service Mode

Print a nozzle check pattern Head cleaning

NG
OK

Select the media / calibrator,

and print the Color Chart.

Dry the Color Chart (5 min.)

Measure the Color Chart.

Convert the color measurement The ColorBase2 performs this

data to Color ID, then write process automatically by clicking
Color ID to the printer. [Active] button.

End

Figure 5-48. Overall Workflow

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 298

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 Procedure
1. Connect the printer and the calibrator with the PC to which the ColorBase2 is
installed using USB cables. 1 2
2. Turn the printer on.
3. Start up the ColorBase2.
4. Switch to Service Mode from the main menu screen: Click a point to show in
“O” of the Figure 5-49 in the pointer of the mouse in turn.
5. Input “7777” in the “enter password” cell, then click [OK] button (the
password is fixed and cannot change).

4 3

Figure 5-49. Switching to Service Mode

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 299

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6. Click Start Calibration icon in the main menu screen.

The list of “Applied Calibration Data” cannot be referred in the

service mode.

7. Click [Nozzle Check] to execute the check.

8. Check the printed nozzle check pattern.
When there are broken lines or missing segments
Click [Nozzle Check] to execute the cleaning, then reprint a nozzle check
pattern and check it. No effect in
Service Mode
When there are no broken lines or missing segments
Click [Next] to go to the Print Color Chart screen.

 The Next button becomes active after the Nozzle Check is Figure 5-50. Screen of the starting calibration
executed.
 If there are broken lines or missing segments, repeat the head
cleaning until they are eliminated.

Step 7

Step 8

Figure 5-51. Nozzle Check screen

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 300

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

9. Select the following on the Print Color Chart window.

Media Type: Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte /
Enhanced Matte Paper, Archival Matter
Paper
Paper Size: A4 / Letter
Color Measurement Device: i1Pro2
Clicking [Connection Check] displays a
message according to the connection status
with the color measurement device.
Calibrated Date: Displays the last calibration date of the
printer. Pressing [Acquire] refreshes the
display. The following table shows the
display and each detail.

Table 5-9. Display and Status

Effective date State
After the print head is replaced, calibration has not been
Unadjusted
performed even once by a serviceman or user.
 When the print head is not replaced:
Calibration has not been performed even once by a
serviceman or user.
State at the Time of Purchase
 When the print head is replaced:
Calibration has not been performed by a serviceman or user
after calibration by a serviceman at print head replacement.
YYYY/MM/DD
(Date when calibration was Calibration was performed by a user.
performed) Step 10

10. Click [Print] icon and load two sheets on the ASF, then print the chart.

Figure 5-52. Print Color Chart setting

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 301

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 The recommended air temperature range for printing a Product name,

serial no., selected
Calibration Chart is 15 degrees to 28 degrees. black ink, print
 The contents of the color chart differ between the User Mode date
and the Service Mode. (No row or column numbers of the Nozzle Check
patches are printed in the Service Mode, but the nozzle check Pattern
pattern is printed instead.)

11. Confirm there is no dot missing in the nozzle check pattern on the bottom of
the color chart. If any are found, run a cleaning from the panel menu on the
printer, and then click [Print again].
12. After drying is complete (after 5 minutes has passed), click [Next] to go to the
measurement window.

Product name,
serial no., selected
black ink, print
date

192 calibration
patches
Figure 5-54. Illustration of Calibration Chart (1)

Figure 5-53. Illustration of Calibration Chart (1)

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 302

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5 min. later

Active in 5 min.

Figure 5-55. Drying the Chart

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 303

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

13. Confirm the calibrator is connected, click [OK].

14. Place the calibrator on the white reference tile (white plate) and click [OK].

Step 13

Step 14

Figure 5-56. Preparing the Calibrator

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 304

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 The white reference tile (white plate) on the calibration plate

Place the chart with the nozzle Secure with the clip as not
should be clean. Clean off any dirt with alcohol or other check pattern to the left. to hide the upper line.
organic solvent. Use a soft cloth so as not to damage the white
reference tile (white plate).
 The white reference tile (white plate) and the calibrator are
used as a pair. Do not use any other plate attached with other
calibrators.

15. Place the color chart on the backing board as shown in Figure 5-58 and set the
scanning ruler, and then click OK. (Use Premium Glossy Photo Paper instead
if no backing board is available.) i1Pro2 is used for explanation in the
following figures.

To avoid rubbing the color patches, set the color chart and perform
the calibration with the display on the tool window rotated in 90
degrees counterclockwise.

The chart for User Mode is used

on the tool window.

Measurement start point

Measuring direction

Align the edge of scale with the first

row of the calibration patches.

Figure 5-58. Color chart setting

Step 15

Figure 5-57. Preparation for calibration

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 305

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

16. Perform color measurement according to the instruction on the window. Press and hold the button on the calibrator and wait for one to two seconds, and then keep holding
it and slide the calibrator at a steady speed in the measuring direction from the measurement start point shown in Figure 5-58.
i1Pro: Slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from left to right in approximately five seconds.
i1Pro2: Slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from left to right in approximately five seconds, and let go of the button once. And then, press and hold the button
on the calibrator again, and then keep holding it and slide the calibrator on the calibration patches from right to left in approximately five seconds.
When the color measurement is successfully complete, “O” appears, and then perform the color measurement on the next row.

1 2 Measurement start point

4

Orientation of the chart when measuring

(1) Color measurement Measured rows (starting from the left)

“complete” rows
(2) Color measurement “not Rows to be measured (up to the right end)
complete” rows
(3) Cursor Automatically moves right when color measurement of a row is complete.
(4) Measurement result “O” appears if the color value is within the normal range. Otherwise or the number of patches is not
matched, “X” appears.
(5) Stop button Discards the current measurement result and go back to the previous window before measurement.

Figure 5-59. Starting the Color Measurement

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 306

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 5-10. Limitations of the calibrator Table 5-11. Troubleshooting when the measurement fails
i1Pro2 Presumable Cause Major Troubleshooting
Measurement start Upper left on the color chart The adjustment of the printer may be After the adjustments that must be done
point insufficient. after parts replacement are all complete,
 Outward (tungsten light): In
perform the measurement again.
the direction of the arrow in  The media has deteriorated and discolored. Use new Ultra Premium Presentation Paper
Figure 5-58 only.  The media was stored in bad conditions Matte Enhanced Matte Paper or Archival
Measuring direction
 Inward (UV light): In the and damaged. Matte Paper.
reverse direction from the The color or contamination of the backing may  When using the backing board: remove
outward scanning be interfering. any contamination on the backing
Times of Two times (one cycle) board, and then stack two color charts
measurements per over on each other and perform the
row measurement.
Perform the measurement of the  Measurement without a backing board:
When the failed row. Cannot go on to the Stack the color chart over on each other
measurement fails next row until the measurement on blank (white) Premium Glossy Photo
is successfully complete. Paper and perform the measurement.
Wrong row/wrong measuring direction See Figure 5-58 and table 5-10 and confirm
 During color measurement, do not allow the calibrator to rub the current row to be measured and the
against unmeasured patches on the chart. measuring direction are correct.
 Prevent the ruler and calibrator from coming off the chart Measuring at an angle Align the scale with the chart correctly
sheet during color measurement. Doing so will cause incorrect again, and then slide the calibrator in
color measurement. parallel to the row to be measured on the
patches.
 Do not press the calibrator to the chart too strongly, otherwise
the patch may be damaged.
 If “X” appears repeatedly and the measurement fails
continuously, the measured color value may be far out of the
standard range. In that case, end the measurement and go to
the troubleshooting below.

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 307

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

17. When the measurement of all the rows is complete, click [Completed].
18. Click [Next] on the color measurement completed window.
19. On the apply calibration data window, click [Active] to write the calibration
data to the printer.
20. End the tool.

Step 18

Step 17

Figure 5-60. Color measurement completed

Step 19

Figure 5-61. Application of correction values

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 308

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

5.6.3 Maintenance menu

To display the maintenance menu, click [Maintenance] on the main screen.

Table 5-12. Details of the maintenance menu

Item Description
(1) Main screen button Goes back to the main screen.
(2) Nozzle check button Prints a nozzle check pattern.
Select a cleaning level among CL1, CL2, CL3,
and CL4 and run it. (Level selection available
(3) Head cleaning button only in the Service Mode. Basically use CL1,
and if not improved much, raise the level and
try again.)
Overwrite the data in the User Color ID area
(4) Restore Default Calibration button back to the saved data in the Production Color
ID area.
Save “User Operation log”, “Debug log”, and
“CID log” as a zip file. Servicemen can use
“User Operation log” only. “User Operation
log" is contained in “UserOperation.zip”. For
(5) Save Log button
how to see logs, refer to table 5-13.
If an error occurs while a log is being saved, the 2
panel freezes displaying “printing”. In such a
case, reboot the printer.)
3

To check a log file, open the file with Excel or browse it after
changing its extension to “.csv”. 4

Figure 5-62. Maintenance menu

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 309

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 5-14. Operation

v

Table 5-13. User operation log

Item Display Explanation Character string Record timing Reference
Date YY/MM/DD Date when operation was performed When writing data normally was
Application of applied
performed after [Active] was pressed and
Time (UTC) HH:MM:SS (HH) Time when operation was performed calibration data failed.
abnormally ended
Mode selected
Deleted applied calibration Figure 5-50
Mode User/SS  User: User mode When [Delete] was pressed
data.
 SS: Service mode
When [Switched Service Mode]
 Main Switched Service Mode.
succeeded
 Head Maintenance
When nozzle check was performed after
 Print Color Chart Nozzle Checked.
Screen Screen name [Nozzle Check] was pressed
 Spectrometer Figure 5-51
When head cleaning was performed after
 Apply Calibration Data Head Cleaning was executed.
[Head Cleaning] was pressed
 Maintenance
Print button was pressed. When [Print] was pressed
Serial --- Printer serial No.
When [OK] was pressed in the color chart
Paper Paper size/Paper kind Paper type/ paper size Print start was pressed.
print check screen
Measurement Figure 5-52
--- Tool device name When printing was normally performed
device Print succeeded.
after [Print] was pressed
Operation history (For details, refer to
Operation --- When printing was performed after
table 5-14.) Print error occurred.
[Print] was pressed and ended abnormally
Table 5-14. Operation When the processing succeeded after
Preparation of color
[color measurement device is ready] is
Character string Record timing Reference measurement succeeded.
pressed Figure 5-56
Launch. When the application was started Figure 5-49 Preparation of color When the processing failed after [color
Export succeeded. When exporting a file normally ended measurement failed. measurement device is ready] is pressed
Export failed. When exporting a file abnormally ended When the color measurement start screen
Started Measurement.
Import succeeded. When importing a file normally ended was displayed

Import failed. When importing a file abnormally ended When the color measurement start screen
Measurement error occurred.
was displayed Figure 5-59
When the application was exited (When
Quit. When canceling the “color measurement
exit operation was performed) Figure 5-50 Measurement stopped.
screen” was completed
Start calibration button was
When [Start Calibration] was pressed Measurement completed. When [Completed] was pressed
pressed.
Maintenance button was When a disconnection of the USB cable of
When [Maintenance] was pressed Color measurement device
pressed. the color measurement device was Figure 5-56
was not detected.
detected
Application of applied When writing data normally ended after
calibration data completed. [Active] was pressed

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 310

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 5-14. Operation

Character string Record timing Reference
Application of calibration When writing data normally ended after
data completed. [Active] was pressed
When writing data normally was Figure 5-61
Application of calibration
performed after [Active] was pressed and
data failed.
abnormally ended
When initializing the correction value
Restore Default Calibration
succeeded after [Restore Default
succeeded.
Calibration] was pressed
Figure 5-62
When initializing the correction value
Restore Default Calibration
failed after [Restore Default Calibration]
failed.
was pressed
When saving a log succeeded after [Save
Save Log succeeded.
Log] was pressed
Figure 5-62
When saving a log failed after [Save Log]
Save Log failed.
was pressed
Figure 5-51,
Main Screen button was When the display returned to the main Figure 5-55,
pressed. screen after [Main Screen] was pressed Figure 5-61,
Figure 5-62
Figure 5-51,
When the screen proceeded to the next
Next button was pressed. Figure 5-56,
screen after [Next] was pressed
Figure 5-61

Adjustment Colorimetric Calibration 311

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

6
MAINTENANCE

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6.1 Overview  Ensure sufficient work space for servicing.

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
operating condition. cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.
Be sure to strictly observe the following precautions to avoid an accident or injury  Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space
causing the user trouble. before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
 The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the power
 Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply circuit
elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is
damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated
with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power
as anti-static wrist straps.
code from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling
 When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit.
take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 The sensor detector cover printer provided for detecting open/
moving parts such as the fan unit.
close status of the cover printer Assy also acts as a safety
 When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after
interlock switch. Never disable the switch function to prevent
being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
possible injury. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure
the power OFF.
to take safety precautions and turn the function back to enabled
 Check that the Print Head is capped properly.
after the operation.
 Leave the ink cartridges installed in the printer.
 Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your  Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is materials and protective equipment indicated in the
found, contact a physician. unpacking guide.

Maintenance Overview 313

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6.2 Transportation

 When lifting the printer, work in a posture that does not

damage your body.
 Not to damage the printer, grip the handling positions shown in
the figure below when moving/transporting the printer.
 To prevent the print head from drying or ink leakage, keep the
ink cartridges installed.

Lift the printer by holding the positions shown below.

Figure 6-1. Transportation

Maintenance Transportation 314

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6.3 Cleaning  Platen’s surface

Check if any paper dust or foreign matter on the surface. If do, wipe them off
Except for the print head, there are no other mechanical parts or units that require with a damped soft cloth.
periodic cleaning. However, if need arises, clean the component observing the
following instructions.
 Instructions for cleaning
 Exterior parts such as housing
Wipe dirt off with a soft clean cloth moistened with water. For glossy or
transparent parts, use of unwoven cloth is recommended to avoid scratching
those parts.
 Inside of the printer Cleaning Point

Remove paper dust with a vacuum cleaner.

 Rubber or plastic rollers such as an LD roller used to feed paper
If paper dust adhered to the rollers decreases the frictional force of the rollers
and the rollers cannot properly feed paper, wipe off the paper dust with a soft
cloth moistened with diluted alcohol.
 Instructions for cleaning ink stains
Wipe the stains off with a cloth wrung out of diluted alcohol.

 Do not use alcohol for cleaning the transparent parts. Doing so

may cause them to get cloudy.
 When wiping paper dust off the LD roller, be careful not to rub
against the surface asperity.
 To minimize the effect on the parts, use diluted alcohol such as
70% diluted ether.
 After using alcohol for cleaning, make sure to wipe the part off
with a soft dry dust-free cloth to remove alcohol traces fully.

Figure 6-2. Cleaning point of Platen surface

Maintenance Cleaning 315

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

 ASF PF roller (LD roller), Retard roller  Paper feed path

Check if any paper dust been accumulated. If do, wipe them off with a Check if any paper dust been accumulated or adhered. Vacuum them with a
damped soft cloth. vacuum cleaner or wipe them off with a damped soft cloth. Check if any
foreign object is remained ion the paper feed path, and remove the remaining
foreign object.

Cross-section view

Cleaning Point (paper feed path)

Rear Cleaning Point

Figure 6-4. Cleaning point of paper feed path

Figure 6-3. Cleaning point of ASF PF roller (LD roller), retard roller

Maintenance Cleaning 316

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6.4 Lubrication
The type and amount of the grease used to lubricate the printer parts are determined
based on the results of the internal evaluations. Therefore, refer to ’ 6.4.1 Lubrication
Points and Instructions (p318)’ for the repairing procedures below, and apply the
specified type and amount of the grease to the specified part of the printer mechanism.

’ 6.4.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions (p318)’ also provides information about
whether or not the parts which require lubrication are supplied as ASP and the
lubrication status when supplied as ASP. For the parts which are not supplied as ASP,
if their movement is not smooth enough, check their lubrication status and lubricate
them if necessary.
 Grease

Type Name EPSON Part Code Supplier

Grease G-96 1590700 EPSON
Grease G-97 1635441 ---

 Tools

Name Supplier EPSON Part Code

Injector ---* ---
Brush ---* ---
Flux dispenser ---* 1049533
Note *: Use tools whose specifications are specified in ’ 6.4.1 Lubrication Points and
Instructions (p318)’

Maintenance Lubrication 317

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

6.4.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>
None None
<Lubrication status when <Lubrication status when
supplied as ASP> supplied as ASP>
Not applied Not applied
Holder Release
<Application Point> Shaft Assy. <Application Point>
1. Inner surface of the hole Contact point between the
on the Bushing Roller PF Holder Release Shaft Assy. and
2. Inner surface of the hole Shaft Release Assy.
on the Bushing,Roller,EJ (SC-P700: 6 points
<Type> SC-P900: 8 points)
G-97 <Type>
<Application Amount> G-97
Φ2mm x 10mm <Application Amount>
<Remarks> Φ2 x 5mm x 2 points each
Spread it with brush after Rear (SC-P700) <Remarks>
application with injector. Spread it with brush after
application with injector.

Bushing Roller PF

Bushing,Roller,EJ
Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-5. Figure 6-6.

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

None None
<Lubrication status when Right <Lubrication status when
Left supplied as ASP> supplied as ASP>
Not applied Not applied
<Application Point> <Application Point>
Contact points between Contact point between the
Grounding,Spring,EJ and Grounding,Spring and Shaft,
Shaft, EJ Tray, Front
Shaft, EJ
<Type> <Type>
G-97 G-97
<Application Amount> <Application Amount>
Φ2mm x 10mm Adequate amount
<Remarks> <Remarks>
Spread it with brush after Spread it with brush after
application with injector. Grounding,Spring application with injector.
Shaft, Tray, Front

Grounding,Spring,EJ

Shaft, EJ

Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-7. Figure 6-8.

Maintenance Lubrication 318

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

None None
Holder,Shaft,LD
<Lubrication status when <Lubrication status when
supplied as ASP> CR Sub Frame supplied as ASP>
Not applied Not applied
<Application Point> <Application Point>
Semicircular part of the 1. Contact Point between the
Holder,Shaft,LD CR Main Frame and CR
<Type> Assy. (4 points)
G-97 2. Contact Point between the
CR Sub Frame and CR
<Application Amount> Assy.
Adequate amount
<Type>
Rear <Remarks> CR Main Frame G-97
Spread it with brush after
<Application Amount>
application with injector.
Adequate amount
<Remarks>
 Spread it with brush after
application with injector.
 Be careful not to
lubricate parts other than
specified part.
CR Main Frame

Holder,Shaft,LD
Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-9. Figure 6-10.

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

1 1 None None
<Lubrication status when <Lubrication status when
supplied as ASP> supplied as ASP>
Not applied Not applied
<Application Point> <Application Point>
Slider Transmission
1. Contact points between Contact points of the Main
the Frame
Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR <Type>
and Main Frame (4 points)
G-97
2. Contact points between
Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR the <Application Amount>
Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR Adequate amount
and Driven Pulley (6 <Remarks>
points)
 Spread it with brush after
<Type> application with injector.
G-97  Be careful not to
<Application Amount> lubricate parts other than
specified part.
Adequate amount
<Remarks>
Apply with brush.

Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR Holder,Pulley,Driven,CR
Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-11. Figure 6-12.

Maintenance Lubrication 319

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

None Supplied as the PGF Assy.
Right <Lubrication status when <Lubrication status when
supplied as ASP> Shaft, EJ supplied as ASP>
Not applied Lubricated
<Application Point> <Application Point>
Shaft holder planet Contact points between the
<Type> PGF,Assy. and the Shaft, EJ
Shaft holder planet (3 points)
G-97
<Type>
<Application Amount>
G-97
Adequate amount
<Application Amount>
<Remarks>
Φ2mm x 10mm x 3 points
 Spread it with brush after
PGF,Assy. <Remarks>
application with injector.
 Be careful not to  Apply with injector.
lubricate parts other than Shaft, EJ Shaft, EJ  Wipe away remaining
specified part. grease.

ASF????

Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-13. Figure 6-14.

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

None Supplied as the Stacker
1 2 <Lubrication status when <Lubrication status when
supplied as ASP> supplied as ASP>
Not applied Not applied
<Application Point> <Application Point>
1. Rail part of the Guide, Dowels on the side of the
Tray, Front, Left Stacker
(2 points) (SC-P700: 4 points)
2. Rail part of the Guide, <Type>
Dowel Dowel
Tray, Front, Right G-96
(2 points)
<Application Amount>
Guide, Tray, Front, Left Guide, Tray, Front, Right 3. Contact points of the
Link,EJ,Left (2 points) Adequate amount
4. Contact points of the <Remarks>
3 4 Link,EJ,Right (2 points) Apply with Flux Dispenser.
<Type>
G-96
Link,EJ,Left Link,EJ,Right <Application Amount>
Adequate amount
<Remarks> Stacker
Apply with brush.

Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-15. Figure 6-16.

Maintenance Lubrication 320

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

Left Right
Supplied as the Housing Supplied as the Stacker
Lower Assy. <Lubrication status when
<Lubrication status when supplied as ASP>
supplied as ASP> Not applied
Not applied <Application Point>
<Application Point> Ribs on the side of the
Grooves on the Housing Stacker
Lower Assy. (SC-P900: 4 points)
(SC-P700: 2 points) <Type>
Rib Rib
<Type> G-96
G-96 <Application Amount>
<Application Amount> Adequate amount
Adequate amount <Remarks>
<Remarks> Apply with Flux Dispenser.
Apply with Flux Dispenser.

Housing Lower Assy. Housing Lower Assy.

Stacker

Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-17. Figure 6-18.

<Part supply as ASP> <Part supply as ASP>

Left Right
Supplied as the Housing Supplied as the ASF Assy.
Lower Assy. <Lubrication status when
<Lubrication status when supplied as ASP>
supplied as ASP> Not applied
Not applied <Application Point>
<Application Point> Contact point of the cam (2
Grooves on the Housing points)
Lower Assy. <Type>
(SC-P900: 2 points)
G-97
<Type>
<Application Amount>
G-96
Adequate amount
<Application Amount>
<Remarks>
Adequate amount ASF,Assy.
Spread it with brush after
<Remarks> application with injector.
Apply with Flux Dispenser.

Housing Lower Assy. Housing Lower Assy.

Application Point Application Point

Figure 6-19. Figure 6-20.

Maintenance Lubrication 321

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
 CHAPTER

7
APPENDIX

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.1 Block wiring diagram 7.1.1 General

I/C CRCM
Ink leak sensor Ink leak sensor I/C CRCM 7:LC I/C CRCM I/C CRCM 4:LGY
I/C 9:Y
board 1 board 4 3:GY
CRCM I/C CRCM
I/C CRCM 8:VLM 6:VM 2:Pk I/C CRCM
5:C
Ink leak Ink leak
sensor board 3 sensor board 2 CRCM (1) CRCM (2)
㻯㻺㻞 㻯㻺㻞

㻯㻺㻢 㻯㻺㻟 㻯㻺㻢 㻯㻺㻟

㻯㻺㻣 㻯㻺㻠 㻯㻺㻣 㻯㻺㻠

㻯㻺㻡 㻯㻺㻢
Ink end

㻯㻺㻣
㻯㻺㻟
sensor board 㻯㻺㻠
MTB CRCM 㻯㻺㻝 㻯㻺㻝

㻯㻺㻝 I/C CRCM 10:V Panel Assy Front tray detection

IS SUB board Assy High voltage
I/C CRCM 1:Mk ASF paper Stacker cover board Assy
Detector APG detection detection
FAN sensor sensor
CR sub board Assy RLS/APG PF encoder Assy
encoder
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻞 Wi-Fi board Assy

㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻜 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻝 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻞 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻟 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻠 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻟
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻞
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻟 㻔㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㼚㼑㼠㻕
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻥
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻟
㻯㻺㻞㻜㻟 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻢 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻠
Main board Assy
㻯㻺㻠㻜㻟

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻠

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻞

㻯㻺㻠㻜㻝
㻯㻺㻟㻜㻡 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻞 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻠 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻣 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻢
CR 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻝 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻟 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻞 㻯㻺㻟㻜㻠 㻯㻺㻞㻝㻢 㻯㻺㻞㻜㻤 㻯㻺㻡㻜㻞
Detector encoder
PW USB

RLS/ Motor IS/ASF

decomp motor Release ASF
APG Printer cover
detection home
motor detection
sensor detection
sensor
sensor
CR PF PE LED module
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
detector Roll unit detection
Print head motor motor sensor

㻯㻺㻝㻜㻞 Roll paper setup detection sensor PS

㻯㻺㻝㻜㻟 Roll paper detection sensor (1)
17” roll unit 㻯㻺㻝㻜㻠 Roll paper detection sensor (2)
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻡 Roll cover detection sensor
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻢 ATC motor

17” only (roll unit (OP))

Appendix Block wiring diagram 323

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.2 Head Fuse

Number of Head Fuses: 3 (F401/F402/F403)

Appendix Head Fuse 324

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.3 Panel menu map

䕔㼁㼟㼑㼞㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻹㼍㼜
䖩㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㼕㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻔㻕㻦㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓
㻌㻖㻝㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻤㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥䚷㻖㻞㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻢㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻾㼑㼍㼞㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻾㼑㼍㼞 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞 㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻾㼛㼘㼘㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㻙㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞 㻙 㻲㼕㼚㼑 㻭㼞㼠 㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻸㼡㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻰㼕㼟㼏㻌㼀㼞㼍㼥 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐
㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞 䇵 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼑㼞 㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻮㼍㼞㼥㼠㼍 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟 㻯 㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟
㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻿㼍㼠㼕㼚
㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻠㻚㻝㻌㼤㻌㻡㻚㻤㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻝㻜㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻤㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻹 㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟
㼁㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㻡㻚㻤㻌㼤㻌㻤㻚㻟㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻝㻠㻤㻌㼤㻌㻞㻝㻜㻌㼙㼙㻕 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻮㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻤㻚㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻞㻥㻣㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼑㼚㼠㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐 㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼤㻌㻝㻢㻚㻡㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻥㻣㻌㼤㻌㻠㻞㻜㻌㼙㼙㻕 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻝㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻥㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻟㻟㻜㻌㼤㻌㻠㻤㻟㻌㼙㼙㻕
㼁㼟㼑㼞㻙㻰㼑㼒㼕㼚㼑㼐 㻝㻢㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻞㻟㻚㻠㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻠㻞㻜㻌㼤㻌㻡㻥㻠㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻲 㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㼂㼑㼘㼢㼑㼠㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㼁 㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻿㼙㼛㼛㼠㼔㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠
㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻌㼕㼚 㼃㼍㼠㼑㼞㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼐㼕㼍㼚㼠㻌㼃㼔㼕㼠㼑
㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻌㼕㼚 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻡㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻤㻚㻡㻌㼕㼚 㼃㼍㼟㼔㼕
㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻣㻌㼕㼚 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻝㻣 㼤 㻞㻞 㼕㼚㻖㻝

㻮 㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻣㻚㻞㻌㼤㻌㻝㻜㻚㻝㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻝㻤㻞㻌㼤㻌㻞㻡㻣㻌㼙㼙㻕
㻝㻜㻚㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻚㻟㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻡㻣㻌㼤㻌㻟㻢㻠㻌㼙㼙㻕
㻝㻠㻚㻟 㼤 㻞㻜㻚㻟 㼕㼚 㻔㻟㻢㻠 㼤 㻡㻝㻡 㼙㼙㻕㻖㻝

㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐
㻟㻚㻥㻌㼤㻌㻡㻚㻤㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻝㻜㻜㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻤㻌㼙㼙㻕

㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻟㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻡㻌㼕㼚
㻠㻌㼤㻌㻢㻌㼕㼚
㻡㻌㼤㻌㻣㻌㼕㼚
㻡㻌㼤㻌㻤㻌㼕㼚
㻠㻌㼤㻌㻣㻚㻝㻝㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻤㻌㼤㻌㻝㻜㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠
㻝㻞㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻠 㼤 㻝㻣 㼕㼚㻖㻝
㻝㻢 㼤 㻞㻜 㼕㼚㻖㻝

㻾 㼛㼘㼘㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻯㼡㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㻳㼡㼕㼐㼑㼘㼕㼚㼑
㻯㼡㼠 㻻㼚
㻯㼡㼠㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻱㼖㼑㼏㼠 㻻㼒㼒䖩
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻯㼡㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㻳㼡㼕㼐㼑㼘㼕㼚㼑 㻯 㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼃㼕㼐㼠㼔 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼃㼕㼐㼠㼔 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼃㼕㼐㼠㼔 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㻙㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻸㼡㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐
㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻮㼍㼞㼥㼠㼍 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟
㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻿㼍㼠㼕㼚
㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼃㼕㼐㼠㼔
㻝㻟㻌㼕㼚 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟
㻝㻢 㼕㼚㻖㻝 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻝㻢㻚㻡 㼕㼚㻖㻝 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼑㼚㼠㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻝㻣 㼕㼚㻖㻝 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㼁㼟㼑㼞㻙㻰㼑㼒㼕㼚㼑㼐䖩
㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㼂㼑㼘㼢㼑㼠㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻿㼙㼛㼛㼠㼔㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠
㼃㼍㼠㼑㼞㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼐㼕㼍㼚㼠㻌㼃㼔㼕㼠㼑
㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㼃㼍㼟㼔㼕
㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉

㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞㻌㻙㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞

㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㻙㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻸㼡㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐
㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻮㼍㼞㼥㼠㼍 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟
㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻿㼍㼠㼕㼚
㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻤㻚㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻞㻥㻣㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟
㼁㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼤㻌㻝㻢㻚㻡㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻥㻣㻌㼤㻌㻠㻞㻜㻌㼙㼙㻕 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻮㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻝㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻥㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻟㻟㻜㻌㼤㻌㻠㻤㻟㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼑㼚㼠㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻝㻢㻚㻡 㼤 㻞㻟㻚㻠 㼕㼚 㻔㻠㻞㻜 㼤 㻡㻥㻠 㼙㼙㻕㻖㻝 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㼁㼟㼑㼞㻙㻰㼑㼒㼕㼚㼑㼐
㼁㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻌㼕㼚 㼂㼑㼘㼢㼑㼠㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻌㼕㼚 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻿㼙㼛㼛㼠㼔㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠
㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻣㻌㼕㼚 㼃㼍㼠㼑㼞㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼐㼕㼍㼚㼠㻌㼃㼔㼕㼠㼑
㻝㻣 㼤 㻞㻞 㼕㼚㻖㻝 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㼃㼍㼟㼔㼕
㻮㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻝㻜㻚㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻚㻟㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻡㻣㻌㼤㻌㻟㻢㻠㻌㼙㼙㻕
㻝㻠㻚㻟 㼤 㻞㻜㻚㻟 㼕㼚 㻔㻟㻢㻠 㼤 㻡㻝㻡 㼙㼙㻕㻖㻝

㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻤㻌㼤㻌㻝㻜㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻞㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻠 㼤 㻝㻣 㼕㼚㻖㻝
㻝㻢 㼤 㻞㻜 㼕㼚㻖㻝

㻰㼕㼟㼏㻌㼀㼞㼍㼥
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑

㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻲㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞㻌䇵㻌㻼㼛㼟㼠㼑㼞㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞

㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㻛㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼚㼠㼘㼥㻌㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㻙㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑㼟 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻸㼡㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻳㼘㼛㼟㼟㼥 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐
㻯㼡㼠㻛㻱㼖㼑㼏㼠 㻼㼘㼍㼕㼚㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻮㼍㼞㼥㼠㼍 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻯㼡㼠 㻼㼛㼟㼠㼏㼍㼞㼐 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻯㼡㼠㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻱㼖㼑㼏㼠 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼑 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟 㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻼㼞㼛㼛㼒㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼑㼙㼕㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑 㻯㼍㼚㼢㼍㼟㻌㻿㼍㼠㼕㼚
㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻵㼚㼗㻌㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㼟 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼕㼦㼑 㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻵㼚㼗㻌㻯㼍㼞㼠㼞㼕㼐㼓㼑㻔㼟㻕㻌㻾㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠 㻭㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻤㻚㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻞㻥㻣㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟
㼁㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㻝㻝㻚㻣㻌㼤㻌㻝㻢㻚㻡㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻥㻣㻌㼤㻌㻠㻞㻜㻌㼙㼙㻕 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻌㻼㼞㼑㼙㻚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻮㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻝㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻥㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻟㻟㻜㻌㼤㻌㻠㻤㻟㻌㼙㼙㻕 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼑㼚㼠㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻹㼍㼕㼚㼠㼑㼚㼍㼚㼏㼑 㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻝㻢㻚㻡 㼤 㻞㻟㻚㻠 㼕㼚 㻔㻠㻞㻜 㼤 㻡㻥㻠 㼙㼙㻕㻖㻝 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㻺㼛㼦㼦㼘㼑㻌㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗 㼁㼟㼑㼞㻙㻰㼑㼒㼕㼚㼑㼐
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㻯㼘㼑㼍㼚㼕㼚㼓 㼁㻿㻙㻭㻺㻿㻵 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻯㼘㼑㼍㼚㼕㼚㼓 㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻝㻌㼕㼚 㼂㼑㼘㼢㼑㼠㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㻭㼘㼕㼓㼚㼙㼑㼚㼠 㻤㻚㻡㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻌㼕㼚 㼁㼘㼠㼞㼍㻿㼙㼛㼛㼠㼔㻌㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻳㼡㼕㼐㼑㻌㻯㼘㼑㼍㼚㼕㼚㼓 㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻣㻌㼕㼚 㼃㼍㼠㼑㼞㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼐㼕㼍㼚㼠㻌㼃㼔㼕㼠㼑
㻵㼚㼗㻌㻯㼍㼞㼠㼞㼕㼐㼓㼑㻔㼟㻕㻌㻾㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠 㻝㻣㻌㼤㻌㻞㻞㻌㼕㼚㻖㻝 㻲㼕㼚㼑㻌㻭㼞㼠㻌㻹㼍㼠㼠㼑
㻾㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㻌㻹㼍㼕㼚㼠㼑㼚㼍㼚㼏㼑㻌㻮㼛㼤 㼃㼍㼟㼔㼕
㻮㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㼇㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻱㻹㼄㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼉
㻝㻜㻚㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻚㻟㻌㼕㼚㻌㻔㻞㻡㻣㻌㼤㻌㻟㻢㻠㻌㼙㼙㻕
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻵㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠 㻝㻠㻚㻟 㼤 㻞㻜㻚㻟 㼕㼚 㻔㻟㻢㻠 㼤 㻡㻝㻡 㼙㼙㻕㻖㻝

㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻝㻜㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻤㻌㼤㻌㻝㻜㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻝㻌㼤㻌㻝㻠㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻞㻌㼤㻌㻝㻞㻌㼕㼚
㻝㻠 㼤 㻝㻣 㼕㼚㻖㻝
㻝㻢 㼤 㻞㻜 㼕㼚㻖㻝

Appendix Panel menu map 325

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

䕔㼁㼟㼑㼞㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻹㼍㼜
䖩㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㼕㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻔㻕㻦㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓
㻌㻖㻝㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻤㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥䚷㻖㻞㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻢㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥
㻳 㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼘㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻌㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼕㼦㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻮㼍㼏㼗㼓㼞㼛㼡㼚㼐㻌㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞
㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻌㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼕㼦㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻮㼍㼏㼗㼓㼞㼛㼡㼚㼐㻌㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞 㻰㼍㼞㼗 㻳㼞㼍㼥 䖩
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚 㻹㼑㼐㼕㼡㼙㻌㻳㼞㼍㼥
㻮㼍㼟㼕㼏㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚 㻸㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻳㼞㼍㼥
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㼃㼑㼎㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻴 㼛㼙㼑㻌㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚
㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼑㼞㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼍㼞㼏㼔 㻿㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐 䖩
㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼑㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻿㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠
㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚
㻼㼔㼛㼠㼛䖩㻖㻞
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠 㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟䖩㻖㻝
㼃㼑㼎㻌㻹㼛㼢㼕㼑㻌㻹㼍㼚㼡㼍㼘㼟 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜㻌㻭㼡㼠㼛㻌㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜㻌㻭㼡㼠㼛㻌㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥 㻻㼚䖩
㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼏㼑 㻻㼒㼒
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻯㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐
㼀㼔㼕㼏㼗㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞 㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼏㼑 㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻹㼕㼟㼙㼍㼠㼏㼔
㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻹㼕㼟㼙㼍㼠㼏㼔 㻻㼚
㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻹㼑㼍㼚㼐㼑㼞㼕㼚㼓 㻻㼒㼒䖩

㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻯㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐 㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㻹㼑㼍㼚㼐㼑㼞㼕㼚㼓
㻻㼚䖩 㻻㼚䖩
㻻㼒㼒 㻻㼒㼒

㼀㼔㼕㼏㼗㻌㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞
㻻㼚
㻻㼒㼒䖩

㻮㼍㼟㼕㼏㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻸㼕㼓㼔㼠
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻸㼕㼓㼔㼠 㻭㼡㼠㼛䖩
㻸㻯㻰㻌㻮㼞㼕㼓㼔㼠㼚㼑㼟㼟 㻹㼍㼚㼡㼍㼘
㻿㼛㼡㼚㼐
㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑㼞 㻸㻯㻰㻌㻮㼞㼕㼓㼔㼠㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻻㼒㼒㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑㼞 㻝䡚㻥
㻰㼍㼠㼑㻛㼀㼕㼙㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻸㼍㼚㼓㼡㼍㼓㼑 㻿㼛㼡㼚㼐 㻹㼡㼠㼑
㻸㼑㼚㼓㼠㼔㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠 㻹㼡㼠㼑 㻻㼚
㻮㼡㼠㼠㼛㼚㻌㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟 㻻㼒㼒
㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼏㼑
㻿㼛㼡㼚㼐㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑 㻮㼡㼠㼠㼛㼚㻌㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟
㻜䡚㻝㻜

㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼏㼑
㻜䡚㻝㻜

㻿㼛㼡㼚㼐㻌㼀㼥㼜㼑
㻼㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚㻌㻝
㻼㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚㻌㻞

㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑㼞
㻟㻌㼙㼕㼚㼡㼠㼑㼟
㻡㻌㼙㼕㼚㼡㼠㼑㼟
㻝㻜㻌㼙㼕㼚㼡㼠㼑㼟
㻝㻡㻌㼙㼕㼚㼡㼠㼑㼟

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻻㼒㼒㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑㼞
㻻㼒㼒䖩
㻟㻜㼙
㻝㼔
㻞㼔
㻠㼔
㻤㼔

㻰㼍㼠㼑㻛㼀㼕㼙㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻰㼍㼥㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻿㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑
㻰㼍㼠㼑㻛㼀㼕㼙㼑䖩 㼃㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞䖩
㻰㼍㼥㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻿㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼕㼙㼑 㻿㼡㼙㼙㼑㼞
㼀㼕㼙㼑㻌㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑
㼀㼕㼙㼑㻌㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑
㻗㻝㻟㻦㻠㻡ࠥ㻙㻝㻞㻦㻠㻡㻌㻔㼕㼚㼏㼞㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠㼟㻌㼜㼑㼞㻌㻝㻡㻌
㼙㼕㼚㼡㼠㼑㼟㻕

㻸㼍㼚㼓㼡㼍㼓㼑
䃽䄶䄧䄟䄜䄬䄭䄦䄤
㻴㼞㼢㼍㼠㼟㼗㼕
㾗㼑㼟㼗㼥
㻰㼍㼚㼟㼗
㻺㼑㼐㼑㼞㼘㼍㼚㼐㼟
㻱㼚㼓㼘㼕㼟㼔䖩
̵αέΎϓ
㻿㼡㼛㼙㼕
㻲㼞㼍㼚㽲㼍㼕㼟
㻰㼑㼡㼠㼟㼏㼔
䂵䃚䃚䃖䃜䃘䃙䃋
ĮäĞŃ ĉı
㻹㼍㼓㼥㼍㼞
㻮㼍㼔㼍㼟㼍㻌㻵㼚㼐㼛㼚㼑㼟㼕㼍
㻵㼠㼍㼘㼕㼍㼚㼛
᪥ᮏㄒ
⺌‫ڝ‬Ụ
㻮㼍㼔㼍㼟㼍㻌㻹㼑㼘㼍㼥㼡
㻺㼛㼞㼟㼗
㻼㼛㼘㼟㼗㼕
㻼㼛㼞㼠㼡㼓㼡㽵㼟
㻾㼛㼙㽭㼚㾎
䄌䄯䄭䄭䄦䄤䄥
㻿㼞㼜㼟㼗㼕
ㆰփѝ᮷
㻿㼘㼛㼢㼑㼚㼟㼗㼥
㻱㼟㼜㼍㽼㼛㼘
㻿㼢㼑㼚㼟㼗㼍
ĚĬģĬĺđĜ
⦾㧓୰ᩥ
㼀㾇㼞㼗㽲㼑
䄏䄦䄬䄜䅂䄩䄜
㼀㼕ұ㼚㼓㻌㼂㼕ҵ㼠

㻸㼑㼚㼓㼠㼔㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠
㼙
㼒㼠㻛㼕㼚

㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻔㻾㼑㼏㼛㼙㼙㼑㼚㼐㼑㼐㻕 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟

㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜 㻾㼛㼡㼠㼑㼞 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜㻌㼃㼕㼦㼍㼞㼐 㻼㻵㻺㻌㻯㼛㼐㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜㻌㻔㼃㻼㻿㻕
㼃㼕㼞㼑㼐㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻔㻾㼑㼏㼛㼙㼙㼑㼚㼐㼑㼐㻕 㻼㼡㼟㼔㻌㻮㼡㼠㼠㼛㼚㻌㻿㼑㼠㼡㼜㻌㻔㼃㻼㻿㻕 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻭㼡㼠㼛㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟 㻰㼕㼟㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕
㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗
㻭㼐㼢㼍㼚㼏㼑㼐 㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟 㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑
㼃㼕㼞㼑㼐㻌㻸㻭㻺㻛㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟 㼕㻻㻿 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻺㼍㼙㼑
㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟 㻭㼚㼐㼞㼛㼕㼐 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㻼㼍㼟㼟㼣㼛㼞㼐
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠 㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻻㻿㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㼟 㻰㼕㼟㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑 㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼑㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻭㼐㼢㼍㼚㼏㼑㼐
㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻺㼍㼙㼑
㼀㻯㻼㻛㻵㻼
㻼㼞㼛㼤㼥㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼑㼞

㼃㼑㼎㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻱㼜㼟㼛㼚㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㼟
㻱㼜㼟㼛㼚㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㼟 㻿㼡㼟㼜㼑㼚㼐㻛㻾㼑㼟㼡㼙㼑
㻳㼛㼛㼓㼘㼑㻌㻯㼘㼛㼡㼐㻌㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㼟 㼁㼚㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞

㻳㼛㼛㼓㼘㼑㻌㻯㼘㼛㼡㼐㻌㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㼟
㻱㼚㼍㼎㼘㼑㻛㻰㼕㼟㼍㼎㼘㼑
㼁㼚㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞

㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼑㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻭㼘㼘㻌㻱㼤㼏㼑㼜㼠㻌㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻯㼘㼑㼍㼞㻌㻭㼘㼘㻌㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠 㻯㼛㼚㼒㼕㼓㼡㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗 㻿㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠
㻼㼞㼛㼎㼘㼑㼙㻌㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㼘㼕㼟㼠 㼁㼟㼍㼓㼑㻌㻴㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㼥㻌㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠
㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼂㼑㼞㼟㼕㼛㼚

㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 㻺㼛㼠㼕㼒㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 㻻㼒㼒䖩
㻺㼛㼠㼕㼒㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻻㼚

Appendix Panel menu map 326

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

䕔㼁㼟㼑㼞㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻹㼍㼜
䖩㻌㻺㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㼕㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻔㻕㻦㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓
㻌㻖㻝㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻤㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥䚷㻖㻞㻦㻌㻿㻯㻙㻼㻢㻜㻜㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥
㻳 㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼘㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼑㼞㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼍㼞㼏㼔 㻼㼞㼛㼢㼕㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻿㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻌㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼕㼦㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻼㼞㼛㼢㼕㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟 㻭㼜㼜㼞㼛㼢㼑
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻯㼛㼡㼚㼠㼞㼥㻛㻾㼑㼓㼕㼛㼚 㻾㼑㼖㼑㼏㼠䖩
㻮㼍㼟㼕㼏㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻯 㼛㼡㼚㼠㼞㼥㻛㻾㼑㼓㼕㼛㼚
㼃㼑㼎㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻭㼘㼎㼍㼚㼕㼍
㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙㼑㼞㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼍㼞㼏㼔 㻭㼘㼓㼑㼞㼕㼍
㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼑㻌㻰㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟 㻭㼚㼓㼛㼘㼍
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠 㻭㼚㼠㼕㼓㼡㼍㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻮㼍㼞㼎㼡㼐㼍
㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 㻭㼞㼓㼑㼚㼠㼕㼚㼍
㻭㼡㼟㼠㼞㼍㼘㼕㼍
㻭㼡㼟㼠㼞㼕㼍
㻭㼦㼑㼞㼎㼍㼕㼖㼍㼚
㻮㼍㼔㼍㼙㼍㼟
㻮㼍㼔㼞㼍㼕㼚
㻮㼍㼚㼓㼘㼍㼐㼑㼟㼔
㻮㼍㼞㼎㼍㼐㼛㼟
㻮㼑㼘㼍㼞㼡㼟
㻮㼑㼘㼓㼕㼡㼙
㻮㼑㼘㼕㼦㼑
㻮㼑㼚㼕㼚
㻮㼛㼘㼕㼢㼕㼍
㻮㼛㼟㼚㼕㼍㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻴㼑㼞㼦㼑㼓㼛㼢㼕㼚㼍
㻮㼛㼠㼟㼣㼍㼚㼍
㻮㼞㼍㼦㼕㼘
㻮㼡㼘㼓㼍㼞㼕㼍
㻮㼡㼞㼗㼕㼚㼍㻌㻲㼍㼟㼛
㻯㼍㼙㼎㼛㼐㼕㼍
㻯㼍㼙㼑㼞㼛㼛㼚
㻯㼍㼚㼍㼐㼍
㻯㼑㼚㼠㼞㼍㼘㻌㻭㼒㼞㼕㼏㼍㼚㻌㻾㼑㼜㼡㼎㼘㼕㼏
㻯㼔㼍㼐
㻯㼔㼕㼘㼑
㻯㼔㼕㼚㼍
㻯㼛㼘㼛㼙㼎㼕㼍
㻯㼛㼟㼠㼍㻌㻾㼕㼏㼍
㻯㼛㼠㼑㻌㼐㻓㼘㼢㼛㼕㼞㼑
㻯㼞㼛㼍㼠㼕㼍
㻯㼡㼎㼍
㻯㼥㼜㼞㼡㼟
㻯㼦㼑㼏㼔 㻾㼑㼜㻚
㻰㼑㼙㼛㼏㼞㼍㼠㼕㼏㻌㻾㼑㼜㼡㼎㼘㼕㼏㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻯㼛㼚㼓㼛
㻰㼑㼚㼙㼍㼞㼗
㻰㼖㼕㼎㼛㼡㼠㼕
㻰㼛㼙㼕㼚㼕㼏㼍
㻰㼛㼙㼕㼚㼕㼏㼍㼚㻌㻾㼑㼜㼡㼎㼘㼕㼏
㻱㼏㼡㼍㼐㼛㼞
㻱㼓㼥㼜㼠
㻱㼘㻌㻿㼍㼘㼢㼍㼐㼛㼞
㻱㼝㼡㼍㼠㼕㼛㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻳㼡㼕㼚㼑㼍
㻱㼞㼕㼠㼞㼑㼍
㻱㼟㼠㼛㼚㼕㼍
㻱㼠㼔㼕㼛㼜㼕㼍
㻲㼕㼚㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻲㼞㼍㼚㼏㼑
㻲㼞㼑㼚㼏㼔㻌㻳㼡㼥㼍㼚㼍
㻲㼞㼑㼚㼏㼔㻌㻼㼛㼘㼥㼚㼑㼟㼕㼍
㻳㼍㼎㼛㼚
㻳㼑㼞㼙㼍㼚㼥
㻳㼔㼍㼚㼍
㻳㼞㼑㼑㼏㼑
㻳㼞㼑㼚㼍㼐㼍
㻳㼡㼍㼐㼑㼘㼛㼡㼜㼑
㻳㼡㼍㼠㼑㼙㼍㼘㼍
㻳㼡㼕㼚㼑㼍
㻳㼡㼕㼚㼑㼍㻙㻮㼕㼟㼟㼍㼡
㻳㼡㼥㼍㼚㼍
㻴㼍㼕㼠㼕
㻴㼛㼘㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻴㼛㼚㼐㼡㼞㼍㼟
㻴㼛㼚㼓㻌㻷㼛㼚㼓
㻴㼡㼚㼓㼍㼞㼥
㻵㼏㼑㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻵㼚㼐㼕㼍
㻵㼚㼐㼛㼚㼑㼟㼕㼍
㻵㼞㼍㼚
㻵㼞㼍㼝
㻵㼞㼑㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻵㼟㼞㼍㼑㼘
㻵㼠㼍㼘㼥
㻶㼍㼙㼍㼕㼏㼍
㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚
㻶㼛㼞㼐㼍㼚
㻷㼍㼦㼍㼗㼔㼟㼠㼍㼚
㻷㼑㼚㼥㼍
㻷㼛㼞㼑㼍
㻷㼡㼣㼍㼕㼠
㻸㼍㼛㼟
㻸㼍㼠㼢㼕㼍
㻸㼑㼎㼍㼚㼛㼚
㻸㼑㼟㼛㼠㼔㼛
㻸㼕㼎㼥㼍
㻸㼕㼑㼏㼔㼠㼑㼚㼟㼠㼑㼕㼚
㻸㼕㼠㼔㼡㼍㼚㼕㼍
㻸㼡㼤㼑㼙㼎㼛㼡㼞㼓
㻹㼍㼏㼑㼐㼛㼚㼕㼍
㻹㼍㼐㼍㼓㼍㼟㼏㼍㼞
㻹㼍㼘㼍㼣㼕
㻹㼍㼘㼍㼥㼟㼕㼍
㻹㼍㼘㼕
㻹㼍㼘㼠㼍
㻹㼍㼞㼠㼕㼚㼕㼝㼡㼑
㻹㼍㼡㼞㼕㼠㼍㼚㼕㼍
㻹㼍㼡㼞㼕㼠㼕㼡㼟
㻹㼍㼥㼛㼠㼠㼑
㻹㼑㼤㼕㼏㼛
㻹㼛㼚㼓㼛㼘㼕㼍
㻹㼛㼚㼠㼑㼚㼑㼓㼞㼛
㻹㼛㼞㼛㼏㼏㼛
㻹㼛㼦㼍㼙㼎㼕㼝㼡㼑
㻹㼥㼍㼚㼙㼍㼞
㻺㼍㼙㼕㼎㼕㼍
㻺㼑㼜㼍㼘
㻺㼑㼣㻌㻯㼍㼘㼑㼐㼛㼚㼕㼍
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼆㼑㼍㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻺㼕㼏㼍㼞㼍㼓㼡㼍
㻺㼕㼓㼑㼞
㻺㼕㼓㼑㼞㼕㼍
㻺㼛㼞㼣㼍㼥
㻻㼙㼍㼚
㻼㼍㼗㼕㼟㼠㼍㼚
㻼㼍㼚㼍㼙㼍
㻼㼍㼞㼍㼓㼡㼍㼥
㻼㼑㼞㼡
㻼㼔㼕㼘㼕㼜㼜㼕㼚㼑㼟
㻼㼛㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻼㼛㼞㼠㼡㼓㼍㼘
㻽㼍㼠㼍㼞
㻾㼑㼜㼡㼎㼘㼕㼏㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻯㼛㼚㼓㼛
㻾㼑㼡㼚㼕㼛㼚
㻾㼛㼙㼍㼚㼕㼍
㻾㼡㼟㼟㼕㼍
㻾㼣㼍㼚㼐㼍
㻿㼠㻚㻌㻷㼕㼠㼠㼟㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻺㼑㼢㼕㼟
㻿㼍㼕㼚㼠㻌㻸㼡㼏㼕㼍
㻿㼍㼕㼚㼠㻼㼕㼑㼞㼞㼑㻘㻹㼕㼝㼡㼑㼘㼛㼚
㻿㼠㻌㼂㼕㼚㼏㼑㼚㼠㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻳㼞㼑㼚㼍㼐㼕㼚㼑㼟
㻿㼍㼡㼐㼕㻌㻭㼞㼍㼎㼕㼍
㻿㼑㼚㼑㼓㼍㼘
㻿㼑㼞㼎㼕㼍
㻿㼕㼚㼓㼍㼜㼛㼞㼑
㻿㼘㼛㼢㼍㼗㼕㼍
㻿㼘㼛㼢㼑㼚㼕㼍
㻿㼛㼡㼠㼔㻌㻭㼒㼞㼕㼏㼍
㻿㼜㼍㼕㼚
㻿㼞㼕㻌㻸㼍㼚㼗㼍
㻿㼡㼞㼕㼚㼍㼙㼑
㻿㼣㼍㼦㼕㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻿㼣㼑㼐㼑㼚
㻿㼣㼕㼠㼦㼑㼞㼘㼍㼚㼐
㻿㼥㼞㼕㼍
㼀㼍㼕㼣㼍㼚
㼀㼍㼚㼦㼍㼚㼕㼍
㼀㼔㼍㼕㼘㼍㼚㼐
㼀㼛㼓㼛
㼀㼞㼕㼚㼕㼐㼍㼐㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼀㼛㼎㼍㼓㼛
㼀㼡㼚㼕㼟㼕㼍
㼀㼡㼞㼗㼑㼥
㼁㻭㻱
㼁㼓㼍㼚㼐㼍
㼁㻷
㼁㼗㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑
㼁㼞㼡㼓㼡㼍㼥
㼁㻿㻭
㼁㼦㼎㼑㼗㼕㼟㼠㼍㼚
㼂㼑㼚㼑㼦㼡㼑㼘㼍
㼂㼕㼑㼠㼚㼍㼙
㼃㼍㼘㼘㼕㼟㻌㻲㼡㼠㼡㼚㼍
㼅㼑㼙㼑㼚
㼆㼍㼙㼎㼕㼍
㼆㼕㼙㼎㼍㼎㼣㼑

Appendix Panel menu map 327

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.4 Parts names used in this manual Table 7-1. Correspondence table
Ref.
Panel names used in this manual ASP part name
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses part (Ch3 sec. No.)
names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the correspondence ROLL UNIT;IEI;CH38;ASP
between the part names used in this manual and those in ASP. Roll Paper 13 Assy 4.4.3.1
PAPER
SUPPORT,REAR,ASSY;IEI;C
Paper Support Assy 4.4.3.2
H38;ASP
COVER,REAR,ASSY;IEI;CH3
Cover Rear Assy 4.4.3.3
8;ASP
Cover Rear Left COVER,REAR,LEFT 4.4.3.4
COVER,STACKER,ASSY;IEI;
Cover Stacker Assy 4.4.3.5
CH38;ASP
Cover MTC Box COVER,MTB 4.4.3.6
HOLDER,DAMPER,LEFT,ASS
Holder Damper Left Assy 4.4.3.7
Y;IEI.,ASP
HOLDER,DAMPER.RIGHT,AS
Holder Damper Right Assy 4.4.3.8
SY;IEI.,ASP

Housing COVER,PRINTER,ASSY;IEI;C
Cover Printer Assy 4.4.3.9
H38;ASP
Band Cover Printer BAND,COVER,PRINTER 4.4.3.9
HOUSING,SIDE,RIGHT
Housing Side Right 4.4.3.10
ASSY;IEI;CH37,ASP
Housing Side Left HOUSING,SIDE,LEFT 4.4.3.11
Housing Side Front HOUSING,SIDE,FRONT 4.4.3.11
Panel Assy PANEL UNIT;IEI;CH38;ASP 4.4.3.12
HOUSING UPPER UNIT;IEI;
Housing Upper Assy 4.4.3.13
CH38,ASP
STACKER,ASSY;IEI;CH37,AS
Stacker Assy 4.4.3.14
P
STACKER,ASSY;IEI;CH38;AS
Stacker 4.4.3.15
P
Stacker Sub Front STACKER,SUB,FRONT 4.4.3.15

Appendix Parts names used in this manual 328

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

Table 7-1. Correspondence table Table 7-1. Correspondence table

Ref. Ref.
Panel names used in this manual ASP part name Panel names used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec. No.) (Ch3 sec. No.)

HOLDER,POROUS DECOMP ASSY;IEI;

HOLDER,POROUS Motor Decomp Assy 4.4.6.1
PAD,PAPER 4.4.3.16 CH38;ASP
PAD,P.G,L,ASSY;IEI.,ASP
GUIDE,LOWER Assy
INK SUPPLY ASSY;EHC;
Housing Ink Supply Assy 4.4.6.2
Damper DAMPER,00ZB 4.4.3.17 IEI;CH38,ASP
HOUSING LOWER UNIT;IEI; ink system GUIDE,TUBE,CR
Housing Lower Assy 4.4.3.18 Tube,Guide,Assy 4.4.6.3
CH38,ASP mechanism ASSY;IEI.,ASP
IS Sub Board Assy BOARD ASSY,SUB 4.4.4.1 FRAME MOTOR IS
Motor IS Assy 4.4.6.4
ASSY;IEI,ASP
CRCM Board Assy CR CONTACT MODULE 4.4.4.2
Ink System Assy INK SYSTEM;IEI;CH38;ASP 4.4.6.5
WIRELESS LAN USB
WiFi Board Assy 4.4.4.3
MODULE CSIC Connector CONNECTOR,CSIC 4.4.6.6
Fan Assy COOLING,FAN 4.4.4.4 PF Encoder Assy BOARD ASSY.,SUB 4.4.7.1

Electric circuit MAIN BOARD Belt PF TIMING BELT,PF 4.4.7.2

Main Board Assy 4.4.4.5
components ASSY;IEI;CH38;ASP
HOLDER LEVER
PE Detector Assy 4.4.7.3
LED Light Assy LED LIGHT ASSY;IEI 4.4.4.6 PE,ASSY;IEI,ASP
POWER SUPPLY HOLDER,ROTARY
Power Supply Assy 4.4.4.7 Holder AP Assy 4.4.7.4
ASSY;IEI;CH38;ASP ENCODER,AP;ASSY,IEI.,ASP
HOLDER,HIGH Paper feed SHAFT,RELEASE,ASSY;IEI.A
mechanism Shaft Release Assy 4.4.7.5
High Voltage Assy VOLTAGE,P.C.B,ASSY;IEI.,A 4.4.4.8 SP
SP
PAPER
PGU Assy 4.4.7.6
APG Assy APG UNIT;IEI; CH38;ASP 4.4.5.1 GUIDE,UPPER,ASSY;IEI.,ASP
Print Head PRINT HEAD,HOK;ASP 4.4.5.2 HOLDER,STAR
EJ Starwheel Assy 4.4.7.7
WHEEL,ASSY;IEI.,ASP
Scale CR SCALE,CR 4.4.5.3
ROLLER,ASSY.,EJ,FRONT;IEI
PULLEY,DRIVEN;B,ASSY.,IE Roller EJ Front Assy 4.4.7.8
Pulley Driven Assy 4.4.5.4 .,ASP
I;ASP
ROLLER,ASSY.,EJ,REAR,ASS
Carriage Motor CR Assy MOTOR,ASSY.,CR 4.4.5.5 PGF Assy 4.4.7.9
Y;IEI.,ASP
mechanism
CABLE,HEAD,ASSY;IEI;CH3
Head FFC Assy 4.4.5.6 Paper feed Motor PF Assy MOTOR,ASSY.,PF 4.4.7.10
8;ASP
mechanism ASF & HOPPER
CARRIAGE ASF Assy 4.4.7.11
CR Assy 4.4.5.7 UNIT;IEI;CH38;ASP
ASSY;IEI;CH38,ASP
Tray,Front TRAY,FRONT,ASSY;IEI.,ASP 4.4.7.12
CR Belt BELT,CR 4.4.5.8
Detector PW BOARD ASSY.,SENSOR 4.4.5.9

Appendix Parts names used in this manual 329

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5 Notes on packing  Securing method

1. Open the printer cover.

This section describes items to note when packing the printer after repair work.
2. Paste the packing tape end which is not folded by aligning to section A of the CR
Assy as shown in the figure.
7.5.1 For SC-P700
3. Paste the packing tape along the side and top side of the CR Assy and housing
7.5.1.1 Securing the CR Assy upper.
 Purpose 4. Close the printer cover.
Prevent damage to the CR unit due to impacts during transportation.
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
A fatal error could occur due to damage to the CR Assy.
 Preparation
One packing tape
Length: 225 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
1. As shown in the following illustration, with the glue side down, fold 90
degrees upward at 150 mm.
2. Further fold 180 degrees to the front. CR Assy
Fold Section A Fold

Glue side

150 mm
Packing tape Housing upper Assy
Figure 7-2. Securing the CR unit

Figure 7-1. Preparation

Appendix Notes on packing 330

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.1.2 Securing the paper support SECURING THE PAPER SUPPORT

 Purpose  Preparation
Prevent the damage to the paper support Assy due to impacts during Two packing tapes
transportation. Length: 325 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored  Securing method
Paper feed failure could occur due to damage to the paper support Assy.
1. Close the paper support.
SECURING THE PAPER SUPPORT REAR 2. Paste two packing tapes (left and right) in the direction from the paper support top
 Preparation to the printer sides.
Two packing tapes
Length: 80 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side Start pasting from here Start pasting from here
Packing tape Packing tape
 Securing method

1. Put the paper support rear into the paper support.

2. Paste two packing tapes (left and right) in the direction from the front to the rear of
the paper support.

Rear Packing tape Paper support Packing tape

Fold
Fold

Paper support

Fold

Front Paper support rear

Paper support

Packing tape
Packing tape

Figure 7-4. Securing the paper support

Figure 7-3. Securing the paper support rear

Appendix Notes on packing 331

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.1.3 Securing cover stacker Assy 7.5.1.4 Securing rear cover

 Purpose  Purpose
Prevent damage to the stacker and Front Tray due to impacts during transportation. Prevent damage to the rear cover and roll unit due to impacts during
transportation.
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
The stacker or front tray could be damaged.  Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
 Preparation The rear cover or roll unit could be damaged.
Two packing tapes  Preparation
Length: 190 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
1. Two packing tapes
 Securing method Length: 100 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
1. House the stacker and Front Tray. 2. One packing tape
Length: 340 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
2. Close the cover stacker Assy.
 Securing method
3. Paste two packing tapes along the corners of the printer front section.
1. House the roll unit Assy.
Front left Front right 2. Close the rear cover.
3. Paste three packing tapes as shown in the figure below.
Start pasting from here Start pasting from here
Packing tape
Rear Packing tape 2

Fold Fold

Packing tape 1 Packing tape 1

Fold Cover stacker Assy Fold

Figure 7-5. Securing the Cover Stacker Assy Rear cover Edge of rear cover

Figure 7-6. Securing the rear cover

Appendix Notes on packing 332

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.2 For SC-P900  Securing method

1. Open the printer cover.

7.5.2.1 Securing the CR Assy
2. Paste the packing tape end which is not folded by aligning to section A of the CR
 Purpose Assy as shown in the figure.
Prevent damage to the CR unit due to impacts during transportation.
3. Paste the packing tape along the side and top side of the CR Assy and housing
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
upper.
A fatal error could occur due to damage to the CR Assy.
4. Close the printer cover.
 Preparation
One packing tape
Length: 225 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
1. As shown in the following illustration, with the glue side down, fold 90
degrees upward at 150 mm.
2. Further fold 180 degrees to the front.
Fold

Glue side CR Assy

Section A Fold

150 mm

Packing tape Housing upper Assy

Figure 7-8. Securing the CR unit

Figure 7-7. Preparation

Appendix Notes on packing 333

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.2.2 Securing the paper support

How to paste
 Purpose Packing tape 1
Prevent the damage to the paper support Assy due to impacts during
transportation.
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
Paper feed failure could occur due to damage to the paper support Assy.

SECURING THE PAPER SUPPORT REAR

 Preparation Paper support rear Paper support rear

1. Two packing tapes Packing tape 1 Packing tape 1

Length: 100 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
2. One packing tape
Length: 140 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
 Securing method 30 mm Fold Fold
30 mm
1. Put the two paper support rear overlapping.
2. Paste the two packing tapes (1) (left and right) to the top side surface of the paper
support rear while folding the tapes and secure the two paper support rear.
Rear
3. Put the paper support rear into the paper support.
4. Paste one packing tape (2) to the center section of the paper support in the
direction from the front to the rear.

Fold

Paper support

Packing tape 2
50 mm

Figure 7-9. Securing the paper support rear

Appendix Notes on packing 334

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

SECURING THE COVER ASF

 Preparation Packing tape Packing tape

Fold Fold
Two packing tapes
Length: 280 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
 Securing method

1. Close the paper support.

2. Paste two packing tapes (left and right) in the direction from the paper support top
to the printer sides.

120 mm
120 mm

Figure 7-10. Securing the cover ASF

Appendix Notes on packing 335

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.2.3 Securing the stacker 3. Paste the excess part of the packing tape bottom end from step 2 above to the
stacker main bottom in the direction toward the rear.
 Purpose
Prevent damage to the stacker due to impacts during transportation. 4. Put the stacker main into the printer.
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored 5. Paste the packing tape top end from step 2 above to the housing lower top in the
The stacker could be damaged. direction toward the rear.
 Preparation 6. Make the fold in the direction toward the printer front.
Three packing tapes
Length: 200 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 60 mm on one side
 Securing method Fold Housing lower

1. Put the stacker sub into the stacker main.

2. Paste three packing tapes to the sacker sub front (left and right) and stacker main
front (center) leaving 15 mm of excess tape at the bottom end.

Stacker main

15 mm
Stacker sub
Packing tape

Figure 7-12. Securing the stacker (2)

Figure 7-11. Securing the stacker (1)

Appendix Notes on packing 336

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.2.4 Securing the cover stacker and cover printer

 Purpose
Prevent damage to the stacker and Front Tray due to impacts during transportation.
Fold Packing tape 3
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
The stacker or front tray could be damaged.
 Preparation
1. Two packing tapes
Length: 150 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
2. One packing tape
Length: 250 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
Packing tape 1 75 mm
3. Two packing tapes
Length: 180 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
 Securing method

1. Close the cover stacker.

2. Paste two packing tapes (left and right) in the direction from the cover stacker Fold
front to the printer sides.
3. Paste one packing tape in the direction from the cover stacker front center section Packing tape 3
to the printer cover rear.
4. Paste two packing tapes along the corners of the printer front section.
Packing tape 2

Start pasting from here

Fold

Packing tape 1
75 mm

Figure 7-13. Securing the cover stacker and cover printer

Appendix Notes on packing 337

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SC-P900/P700 series Revision C

7.5.2.5 Securing Rear Cover

 Purpose
Prevent damage to the rear cover due to impacts during transportation.
 Risks if this packing procedure is ignored
The rear cover could be damaged.
 Preparation
Two packing tapes
Length: 150 mm, width: 22 mm, fold 5 mm on one side
 Securing method
1. Close the rear cover.
2. Paste two packing tapes along the edges of the rear cover.

Rear
Fold Fold
Start pasting from here Start pasting from here
Packing tape Packing tape

Start pasting from here Rear cover Start pasting from here

Figure 7-14. Securing rear cover

Appendix Notes on packing 338

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)